JP7150124B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game state advantageous to a player is generated when a predetermined condition is established.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a game state advantageous to a player is generated when a predetermined condition is established (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, when the result mode of the variable display game executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that the game ball wins in the first start prize winning port or the second start prize winning port) is a predetermined special result. Then, a special game state (jackpot) occurs in which a game value can be awarded to the player. Then, when the special game state occurs with establishment of a specific condition, a specific game state occurs after the special game state ends, in which the special game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state.
In this gaming machine, a special game state, a specific game state after the special game state, and a special game state generated by executing a special figure variation display game as a special result during the specific game state. , a series of special continuation effects are executed.
As a result, in this game machine, a sense of unity is given to the effects that are executed from the current special game state to the next special game state.

JP 2015-104619 A

However, there is a risk that the conventional game machine will lose interest in the game.
In other words, in the conventional game machine, the effects executed during the specific game state and the effects executed during the normal state cannot be associated with each other, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.
An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of games.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first invention comprises first game information acquisition means for acquiring first game information in response to establishment of a first condition, and , a second game information acquisition means for acquiring second game information; a game determination means for executing a game determination based on the first game information or the second game information; game information storage means for storing a predetermined number of second game information as an upper limit; first notification display means for executing a first notification display according to the result of the game determination based on the first game information; 2. second notification display means for executing a second notification display according to the result of the game determination based on the game information; and when a predetermined condition is established, a predetermined game state in which the second condition is easily established is started. and a performance control means for executing a notification effect according to the mode of the second notification display, wherein the predetermined game state control means controls the second 2 When the number of times of notification display reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined game state is terminated, and the notification effect corresponding to the second notification display executed during the predetermined game state, and the predetermined game state Regarding the notification effect corresponding to the second notification display based on the second game information stored in the game information storage means at the time of completion, the content of the characters fighting over a plurality of the second notification displays. It is characterized by being able to execute a notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to the first invention, the notification effect corresponding to the second notification display executed during occurrence of the predetermined game state, and the second game information stored in the game information storage means when the predetermined game state ends. The notification effect corresponding to the second notification display based on the second notification display can be executed over a plurality of times of the second notification display.
As a result, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the player recognizes the advantageous states composed of mutually different game states (during occurrence of the predetermined game state and during non-occurrence of the predetermined game state) as a series of game states. can be made
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the first invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Here, as the first game information, special figure 1 starting information described later corresponds. A main control circuit 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the first game information acquisition means. As the second game information, special figure 2 starting information described later corresponds. A main control circuit 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the second game information acquisition means. As the game information storage means, a special figure 2 start information storage area, which will be described later, corresponds. The game determination corresponds to the starting determination described later. A main control circuit 200 (steps S11-4, S11-5, S11-7), which will be described later, corresponds to the game determination means. The first notification display corresponds to the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol, which will be described later. A special figure 1 display device 61 (main control circuit 200), which will be described later, corresponds to the first notification display means. The second notification display corresponds to the notification display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the second special symbol, which will be described later. As the second notification display means, a special figure 2 display device 62 (main control circuit 200), which will be described later, corresponds. As the predetermined game state, the state during execution of the time saving control described later corresponds. A main control circuit 200 (step S18-2), which will be described later, corresponds to the predetermined game state control means. The predetermined number of times corresponds to a second time saving number of times, which will be described later. The notification effect corresponds to the notification effect (fluctuation effect and stop effect) described later. An effect control circuit 300, which will be described later, corresponds to the effect control means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of a special design lottery. 4 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main loop processing; 7 is a flow chart showing saving processing at power-off. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing switch management processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart showing a special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation waiting process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows processing during a special figure stop. It is a flow chart which shows a special prize opening pre-opening process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric service open/close switching process; It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening opening control process. It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening opening end wait process. It is a flow chart which shows role product opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows role product opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a role product closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a role product release completion|finish wait process. It is a flow chart showing normal game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal electric open/close switching processing; It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product closing effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product open end wait processing. It is a flow chart which shows firing position designation management processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production management processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop production management processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit production management processing. It is a figure which shows a prior determination result pattern. It is a flow chart which shows big hit production management processing. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize production management processing. It is a flow chart which shows addition production management processing. It is a flow chart which shows firing position display management processing. 4 is a diagram showing an example of progress of a game in the pachinko machine 1. FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. FIG.

(Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
A pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. there is

The inner frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape and arranged so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . Inside the inner frame 3, a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2) is attached.
The door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape and arranged so as to be able to be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . Thereby, the door unit 4 can open and close the front side of the game board unit 10 (a game board 11 to be described later) attached to the inner frame 3 . The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged substantially in the center, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 arranged below the transparent plate 4a, and a tray. a firing handle 6 disposed on the side of the unit 5;

The transparent plate 4a is made of a transparent material such as resin, glass, or the like in a flat plate shape, and is arranged on the front side of the game board unit 10 (game area 30) attached to the inner frame 3. As shown in FIG. This allows the player to visually recognize the game board unit 10 (game area 30) through the transparent plate 4a.
The decorative portion 4b is made of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that protrudes forward. At each upper corner of the decorative portion 4b, there is provided a sound removing portion 4c in which a sound generating device (speaker) 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound removal part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound removal holes through which the sound output by the sound generator 22 is passed.
A plurality of frame lamps 20 are arranged inside the decorative portion 4b. Each frame lamp 20 has a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The receiving tray unit 5 has a receiving tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c provided on the front side of the receiving tray 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially columnar shape and arranged so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. - 特許庁The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (an operation of pressing downward). Inside the receiver unit 5, a first operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is arranged. The first operation detection switch 25 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and arranged so as to surround the production button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by the player (rotated around the cylindrical axis). Inside the tray unit 5, a second operation detection switch 26 (see FIG. 3) is arranged for detecting a rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c. The second operation detection switch 26 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60[°]).

A lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the tray unit 5 . The rental operation unit 7 has a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 500 (see FIG. 3) capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 500, the remaining credits of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 500 are displayed on the count display device 7c.
When the ball lending button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit 500, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the receiving tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while the prepaid card with the remaining credits of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit 500, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 500. - 特許庁
Here, as a prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like correspond.
The shooting handle 6 can be rotated by the player. A firing volume (not shown) is arranged inside the firing handle 6 to detect the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated. The launch volume outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control circuit 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board unit.
The game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the front side of the set board, an image display device 23 and a drum type display device 24 attached to the back side of the set board, It has
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side. An opening formed by a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is made of resin and formed in a flat plate shape. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 11 is provided with an opening (not shown) formed of a through-hole at substantially the center thereof. The player visually recognizes the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 and the drums 24a to 24c of the drum-type display device 24 through the openings provided in the game board 11 and the openings provided in the set plate. It is possible to
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which game balls shot out according to the rotation operation of the shooting handle 6 flow down. In the game area 30, there are a left path 30a formed on the left side of the image display device 23 and the drum-type display device 24, and a left-hand path 30a formed on the right side of the image display device 23 and the drum-type display device 24 as paths along which game balls flow down. A right path 30b is formed.
A plurality of board surface lamps 21 (see FIG. 3) are arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11 . Each board lamp 21 has a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The image display device 23 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The image display device 23 has a display screen 23a capable of displaying effect images.
The display screen 23a can configure a fourth effect symbol display area (not shown) in which a fourth effect symbol (not shown) is displayed. The fourth production pattern includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, and symbols.
In the fourth effect symbol display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the fourth effect symbol. The variable display of the fourth effect symbol means that the type of the fourth effect symbol displayed in the fourth effect symbol display area is sequentially changed every predetermined time. The stop display of the fourth effect symbol means that one type of fourth effect symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth effect symbol display area for a predetermined time.
Further, on the display screen 23a, it is possible to configure reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not illustrated) in which reserved symbols (not illustrated) are displayed. In the reserved design display area b1, a reserved design corresponding to the starting information during execution of the notification display (variation display and stop display of special symbols) is displayed. In the reserved design display area b2, a reserved design corresponding to the starting information whose notification display is being reserved is displayed.

The drum-type display device 24 has a left drum 24a, a center drum 24b, and a right drum 24c, which are arranged coaxially with each other.
Each of the drums 24a to 24c is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and has reel data attached to its outer peripheral surface. Each drum 24a-24c has a rotating shaft (not shown) arranged along its central axis. Each of the drums 24a to 24c is arranged so that the rotation axis extends along the left-right direction (the left-right direction shown in FIG. 2), and is arranged so as to be rotatable about the rotation axis.
A plurality of first effect symbols (not shown) are displayed along the rotating direction in the reel data attached to the outer peripheral surface of the left drum 24a. Each first effect pattern includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters.
The left drum 24a can perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol. The variable display of the first effect symbols means that the first effect symbols displayed (arranged) at the predetermined stop position corresponding to the left drum 24a are sequentially replaced by the rotation of the left drum 24a. Stop display of the first effect symbol means that one first effect symbol is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the left drum 24a by stopping the rotation of the left drum 24a.
A plurality of second effect symbols (not shown) are displayed along the rotating direction in the reel data attached to the outer peripheral surface of the central drum 24b. Each second effect pattern includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters.
The central drum 24b can perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol. The variable display of the second effect symbols means that the second effect symbols displayed (arranged) at the predetermined stop position corresponding to the center drum 24b are sequentially replaced by the rotation of the center drum 24b. The stop display of the second production pattern means that one second production pattern is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the central drum 24b by stopping the rotation of the central drum 24b.
A plurality of third effect symbols (not shown) are displayed along the direction of rotation in the reel data attached to the outer peripheral surface of the right drum 24c. Each third effect pattern includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters.
The right drum 24c can perform variable display and stop display of the third effect symbol. The variable display of the third effect symbols means that the third effect symbols displayed (arranged) at the predetermined stop position corresponding to the right drum 24c are sequentially replaced by the rotation of the right drum 24c. The stop display of the third effect symbol means that one third effect symbol is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the right drum 24c by stopping the rotation of the right drum 24c.

Further, the drum-type display device 24 has a stepping motor (not shown) corresponding to each drum 24a-24c and a position detection sensor (not shown) corresponding to each drum 24a-24c.
Each stepping motor rotates the drum 24a-24c corresponding to the stepping motor. Each stepping motor is driven according to a pulse signal input from the performance control circuit 300 .
Each position detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the effect control circuit 300 in response to detection of the origin position (rotational position) of the drums 24a to 24c corresponding to the position detection sensor.
Then, the effect control circuit 300 outputs a pulse signal (frequency, number of pulses, etc.) to the stepping motor corresponding to each drum 24a to 24c, a detection signal input from the position detection sensor corresponding to the drum, , the state of the drum (rotation/stop, direction of rotation, speed of rotation, type of effect symbol displayed at a predetermined stop position, etc.) is controlled.

A first start port 51 is provided below the drum-type display device 24 in the game area 30 . The first starting port 51 is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
On the back side of the game board 11, a special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 (Fig. 3). The main control circuit 200 executes the first special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 .
On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning opening 55 and a lower left winning opening 56 are provided. The upper left other prize-winning opening 55 is a ball-entering opening that opens obliquely upward to the right, and it is always possible to enter a game ball. On the other hand, the lower left other prize winning opening 56 is a ball entrance opened upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. Each of the other prize winning openings 55 and 56 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
A left other winning ball detection sensor 106 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 . The left other winning ball detection sensor 106 outputs a detection signal in response to the detection of the game ball entering each of the other winning holes 55 and 56 (entering the upper left other winning hole 55 or the lower left other winning hole 56). is output to the main control circuit 200 . The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to perform a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106 .

A starting gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 24 a in the game area 30 . The starting gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through it. The starting gate 41 allows passage of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of passage of game balls flowing down the left path).
The starting gate 41 is provided with a normal figure starting ball detection sensor 104 (see FIG. 3). The normal figure starting ball detection sensor 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the starting gate 41 (passage of the starting gate 41 by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 executes a normal symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the normal symbol starting ball detection sensor 104 .
Below the starting gate 41 in the game area 30, a right other winning opening 57 is provided. The right other prize winning opening 57 is a ball entrance opened upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The right other winning opening 57 is capable of entering game balls flowing down the right path (impossible to enter game balls flowing down the left path).
A right other winning ball detection sensor 107 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 . The right other winning ball detection sensor 107 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entering the right other winning hole 57 (the game ball entering the right other winning hole 57). Output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107 .

A second starting opening 52 is provided below the right other winning opening 57 in the game area 30 . The second start port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second start port 52, and a state that allows (easy) the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. There is provided an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a (so-called “tongue”) that can be displaced to an open state to open. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
In this embodiment, the second starting port 52 is a substantially rectangular hole that opens toward the front side. The ordinary electric accessory 52a has an opening/closing plate (not shown) for opening/closing the second starting port 52. As shown in FIG. The opening/closing plate is formed in a substantially square flat plate shape. The opening/closing plate has an opening/closing shaft provided along its lower side. The opening/closing axis extends along the left-right direction. The opening/closing plate can be displaced (opened/closed) in the shape of a door on the upper side of the opening/closing shaft. Specifically, the opening/closing plate can be displaced between a first state in which the second starting port 52 is closed and a second state in which the upper side is tilted toward the front side.
When the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced to the closed state, the opening/closing plate is displaced to the first state, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the right path from entering the second starting port 52. be. On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced to the open state, the opening/closing plate is displaced to the second state, thereby guiding the game ball dropped onto the back surface of the opening/closing plate to the second starting port 52. .
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened/closed) by a starting solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). In the second starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 52a is normally in a closed state, making it impossible to enter the game ball. 52a is opened and a game ball can be entered.
On the back side of the game board 11, a special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entering the second starting hole 52 (entering the game ball into the second starting hole 52) output. The main control circuit 200 executes the second special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 .

Below the second starting port 52 in the game area 30, a prize winning device 54 is provided. The accessory winning device 54 has a ball entrance (not shown) that opens toward the right side, and a special electric accessory 54a (so-called "wing") that opens and closes the ball entrance. The accessory winning device 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
The special electric accessory 54a is in a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter the accessory winning device 54, and allows (easy) entry of game balls into the accessory winning device 54. It is possible to displace to the open state to be.
In this embodiment, the special electric accessory 54a has an opening/closing piece (not shown) for opening/closing the entrance.
The opening/closing piece is formed in a strip shape having a predetermined length. An opening/closing shaft (not shown) is provided at the lower end of the opening/closing piece. The opening/closing axis extends along the depth direction (the depth direction shown in FIG. 2). The opening/closing piece can be displaced (opened/closed) in a door-like manner at its upper end side about the opening/closing shaft. Specifically, the opening/closing piece can be displaced between a first state in which the ball entrance is closed and a second state in which the upper end side is tilted toward the right side.

When the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the closed state, the opening/closing piece is displaced to the first state, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the right path from entering the accessory winning device 54. be done. On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state, the opening/closing piece is displaced to the second state, and the game ball dropped on the side surface of the opening/closing piece is guided into the accessory winning device 54. be.
The special electric accessory 54a is displaced (opened and closed) by an accessory solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3). In the accessory winning device 54, the special electric accessory 54a is normally in a closed state, making it impossible to enter a game ball. It is in an open state, and a game ball can be entered.
A prize winning ball detection sensor 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 . The accessory winning ball detection sensor 105 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the accessory winning device 54 (a game ball entering the accessory winning device 54). output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105 .

Inside the accessory winning device 54, there are a V area (not shown) through which the game ball can pass, an ejection area (not shown) through which the game ball can pass, and a winning ball in the accessory winning device 54. Distributing means (not shown) for distributing the played game balls to one of the V area and the discharge area is provided.
A V winning ball detection sensor 108 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the V area. The V winning ball detection sensor 108 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has passed through the V area (passage of the game ball through the V area). The main control circuit 200 sets a V winning flag area, which will be described later, according to the input of the detection signal from the V winning ball detection sensor 108 .
The sorting means has a V passage state in which game balls that have entered the role prize winning device 54 are sorted into V regions, a non-V passage state in which game balls that have entered the role prize prize device 54 are sorted into discharge regions, It is possible to displace to
As a result, when the sorting means is displaced to the V passage state, the game ball entered into the accessory winning device 54 cannot pass through the ejection area, and the game ball entered into the accessory winning device 54 is played. The spheres are assigned to the V area. On the other hand, when the sorting means is displaced to the non-V-passing state, it becomes impossible for the game ball entered into the accessory winning device 54 to pass through the V area, and the game ball entered into the accessory winning device 54 is played. Balls are distributed to the ejection area. The distribution means is displaced by a V distribution solenoid 67 (see FIG. 3).
A game ball entering the accessory winning device 54 is sorted to one of the V area and the ejection area by the sorting means, and after passing through one of the V area and the ejection area, is directed to the back side of the game board 11. Ejected. In this embodiment, a game ball that has entered the accessory winning device 54 passes through one of the V area and the discharge area after being detected by the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105, and reaches the back of the game board 11. discharged to the side.

A big winning device 53 is provided below the accessory winning device 54 in the game area 30 . The big winning device 53 has a ball entrance (not shown) that opens to the right and a special electric accessory 53a (so-called "slide attacker") that opens and closes the ball entrance. The big winning device 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
The special electric accessory 53a makes it impossible (difficult) to enter a game ball into the big winning device 53, and makes it possible (easy) to enter a game ball into the big winning device 53. It is possible to displace to an open state.
In this embodiment, the big winning device 53 includes a pair of transparent plates (not shown), a game ball receiving portion (not shown) disposed between the pair of transparent plates, and a game ball receiving portion and a ball entrance. Also, the special electric accessory 53a has an opening/closing plate (not shown) for opening/closing the ball entrance.
Each transparent plate is made of a transparent or translucent material and formed into a flat plate shape. Each transparent plate is arranged substantially parallel to the front of the game board 11 (the game area 30). The pair of transparent plates are arranged substantially parallel to each other. Also, the pair of transparent plates are arranged at a predetermined interval so that a game ball can pass between the pair of transparent plates. A plurality of ridges are provided at positions above the opening/closing plate on the front side of the transparent plate on the back side. In addition, a plurality of ridges are provided on the rear surface of the transparent plate on the front side above the opening/closing plate. Each ridge is provided so as to extend along the vertical direction (vertical direction shown in FIG. 2).
The receiving part is formed in a substantially rectangular box shape. The receiving portion has an open upper surface and a ball entrance that opens upward.
The opening/closing plate is formed in a substantially square flat plate shape. The opening/closing plate is arranged with its upper surface inclined (slanted so that the left side is low and the right side is high). The opening/closing plate can be displaced along the depth direction. Specifically, the opening/closing plate is positioned at a first position on the front side of the game board 11 (a first position that closes the ball entrance) via a transparent plate on the back side and a through hole provided in the game board 11, It can be displaced to a second position on the back side of the game board 11 (second position where the ball entrance is opened). Here, the first position is a position between the pair of transparent plates.

When the special electric accessory 53a is displaced to the closed state, the opening/closing plate is displaced to the first state, thereby preventing the game ball from entering the big winning device 53 flowing down the right path. be. At this time, the big winning device 53 allows the game ball to stay (store) on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate. That is, the game ball falling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate arranged at the first position rolls leftward on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate. At this time, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate is slowed in rolling speed by coming into contact with each ridge provided on each transparent plate. As a result, it becomes possible to retain the game balls that have fallen on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate.
On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 53a is displaced to the open state, the opening/closing plate is displaced to the second state, and the game ball that has fallen on the ball entrance enters the big winning device 53. Further, when the game ball is staying on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate arranged at the first position, if the opening/closing plate is displaced from the first position to the second position, it stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate. A game ball in the state enters the big winning device 53. - 特許庁
The special electric accessory 53a is displaced (opened/closed) by the big winning opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the big winning device 53, the special electric accessory 53a is normally in a closed state, making it impossible to enter a game ball. As a result, it becomes possible to enter a game ball.
A big winning ball detection sensor 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 . The big winning ball detection sensor 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the big winning device 53 (entering the game ball into the big winning device 53). . The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103 .

A first out port 58 for ejecting game balls from the game area 30 is provided at the lowest position in the game area 30 . A second out port 59 for ejecting game balls from the game area 30 is provided between the upper left other winning opening 55 and the lower left other winning opening 56 in the game area 30 .
An out ball detection sensor 109 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 . The out ball detection sensor 109 mainly controls the detection signal according to the detection of the game ball entering each out port 58, 59 (entering the game ball into the first out port 58 or the second out port 59). Output to circuit 200 . Here, the out ball detection sensor 109 may be configured to output a detection signal to the effect control circuit 300 .
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide game balls to the respective ball entrances 51 to 57 and the starting gate 41. As shown in FIG.

A state display device 63 (see FIG. 3) is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 11 . The status display device 63 is composed of an LED or the like. The state display device 63 includes a special figure 1 hold number display, a special figure 2 hold number display, a general figure hold number display, a round number display, a launch position display, and the like.
The special figure 1 reserved number display device displays the number of times (special figure 1 reserved number) that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is reserved. The special figure 2 reservation number display device displays the number of times (special figure 2 reservation number) that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is withheld. The normal pattern lottery number display device displays the number of times (normal pattern lottery number) that the display of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is withheld. The round number indicator displays the type of jackpot game state (the number of round game executions). The launch position indicator displays the path (one of the left path and the right path) for designating the launch of the game ball.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 11, there is a normal figure display device 60 (see FIG. 3), a special figure 1 display device 61 (see FIG. 3), and a special figure 2 display device (see FIG. 3) 62. is provided.
Each display device 60, 61, 62 is composed of a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like.
The normal pattern display device 60 can perform variable display and stop display of normal patterns including numbers, patterns, symbols, and the like. Then, in the normal symbol display device 60, the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped normal symbols. Here, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display device 60 becomes a specific pattern, the normal pattern per game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The special figure 1 display device 61 is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device 61, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed first special symbol.
The special figure 2 display device 62 is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device 62, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed second special symbol.

Here, the display of the special design (first special design or second special design) in the special design display devices 61 and 62, and the performance design in the image display device 23 and the drum type display device 24 (first performance design to fourth performance The display of symbols) is associated with the timing when variable display is started, the timing when stop display is started, the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols, and the like.
Specifically, in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol), the variable display of the performance symbols (first to fourth performance symbols) is started. Further, in response to the start of the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol), the stop display of the effect symbols (first to fourth effect symbols) is started. At this time, the performance symbols (first to fourth performance symbols) are stop-displayed in a combination corresponding to the stop-displayed special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol).

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an abnormality detection sensor (not shown) for detecting various abnormal states. Specifically, as various abnormality detection sensors, a magnetic detection sensor that detects magnetism, a radio wave detection sensor that detects radio waves, a vibration detection sensor that detects vibration, an inner frame open sensor that detects the opening of the inner frame 3, a door A glass frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the unit 4 is included. Various abnormality detection sensors output detection signals corresponding to the abnormal states to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of various abnormal states.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control circuit 200, an effect control circuit 300, a payout control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 600 for supplying power to each of the control circuits 200, 300, 400 and the like. and have.
Each of the control circuits 200, 300, and 400 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing programs related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game, and the CPU being stored in the ROM. A microcomputer comprising a RAM (Random Access Memory) that serves as a temporary storage area used to proceed with processing based on a program. The main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300 and the payout control circuit 400 are mounted on separate substrates.

The main control circuit 200 includes a CPU 210 , a ROM 220 , a RAM 230 , an input port 240 , an output port 250 , a frequency generation circuit 260 and a hard random number generation circuit 270 .
The input port 240 is composed of a plurality of input ports (input port 0, input port 1, input port 2 and input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives detection signals from the respective magnetic detection sensors 112, RAM clear signals from the RAM clear switch, and the like.
Input port 1 receives the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103, the detection signal from the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105, the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106, and the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107. A detection signal, a detection signal from the V winning ball detection sensor 108, a detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109, and the like are input.
Input port 2 receives the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102, the detection signal from the normal figure starting ball detection sensor 104, and the power cutoff detection circuit. A power cutoff warning signal or the like is input.
A control command from the payout control circuit 400 is input to the input port 3 .
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 2) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor). In each reception storage area, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is set. Specifically, each reception storage area is set to "1" when the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is input, and is set to "1" when the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is not input. 0” is set.

The output port 250 is composed of a plurality of output ports (output port 0, output port 1 and output port 2 in this embodiment).
Output port 0 outputs control signals to display devices 60 to 63, solenoids 64 to 67, and the like.
The output port 1 transmits control commands to the effect control circuit 300 .
The output port 2 transmits control commands to the payout control circuit 400 . In addition, the output port 2 outputs external information (information regarding the payout of prize balls, information regarding the occurrence of an error (abnormal state), etc.) to the hall computer 700 via the payout control circuit 400 and the external terminal board 420. .

The output port 1 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control circuit 300 as serial data.

The ROM 220 stores a program relating to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game. In particular, the ROM 220 stores a lottery table for executing various lotteries, various control commands necessary for controlling the effect control circuit 300, and the like as data necessary for the progress of the game.
The RAM 230 temporarily stores input/output data in the main control circuit 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing game states, and the like.
In particular, the RAM 230 stores the starting information acquired with the input of the detection signal from each of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101, the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102, and the normal figure starting ball detection sensor 104. area is provided. Here, the starting information refers to information such as various random numbers acquired with the input of each detection signal as a trigger.
Specifically, as the starting information storage area, it is possible to store the starting information (hereinafter referred to as "normal starting information") acquired with the input of the detection signal from the normal starting ball detection sensor 104. It is possible to store the normal figure start information storage area and the start information (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 start information") acquired with the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101. It is possible to store the special figure 1 starting information storage area and the starting information (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 starting information") acquired with the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. It has a possible special figure 2 start information storage area.
In the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area, respectively, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 4) as an upper limit, start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) can be stored.

The frequency generation circuit 260 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the hard random number generation circuit 270 respectively. A hard random number generation circuit 270 generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a winning random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a winning random number for the second special symbol lottery. The hard random number generation circuit 270 updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, within the range of 0 to 65535) each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, thereby generating a winning random number. generate In this embodiment, the value of the loop counter of the hard random number generator 270 is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
Incidentally, the loop counter is set to correspond to each of the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The effect control circuit 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
Based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300 displays the effect image on the image display device 23, and drives (rotates) the drums 24a to 24c (each stepping motor) on the drum type display device 24. , the lighting of the lamps 20 and 21, the output of the effect sound from the sound generator 22, and the like.
The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a program relating to the progress of the performance, data necessary for the progress of the performance, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control circuit 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control circuit 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200 . Then, display control data, motor control data, lamp control data, sound control data, etc. are generated according to a performance control table (performance program) corresponding to the content of the determined performance. Control signals based on the generated control data are output to the image display device 23 , the drum-type display device 24 (each stepping motor), the lamps 20 and 21 , and the sound generator 22 .

The payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball shooting operation of the game ball shooting device 430 based on the detection signal input from the shooting volume.
Specifically, the payout control circuit 400 controls the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball launcher 430 so as to shoot the game ball into the game area 30 with an intensity corresponding to the detection signal input from the launch volume. do.
Also, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 500 .
Specifically, the ball lending button 7 a transmits a ball lending operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board 410 in response to being pressed. Then, when the CR unit 500 receives the ball lending operation signal, it subtracts the power required to pay out a predetermined number of rental balls from the remaining power of the valuable medium recorded in the inserted prepaid card, While updating the record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card, a ball lending instruction signal for instructing the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 via the connection board 410 . Further, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 so as to pay out a predetermined number of game balls upon receiving the ball lending instruction signal.
The CR unit 500 transmits a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium via the connection board 410 when the prepaid cart is inserted and when the record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated. It is transmitted to the display device 7c. When the frequency display device 7c receives the frequency signal, it displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium indicated by the frequency signal.
The return button 7 b transmits a return operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board 410 in response to being pressed. When the CR unit 500 receives the return operation signal, the CR unit 500 returns (discharges) the prepaid card with remaining credits of the valuable medium.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through a starting gate 41.例文帳に追加Then, when winning the normal symbol lottery, a game state per normal pattern is generated. In the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second start port 52.
In this embodiment, one type of "per normal pattern" is set as the type of per normal per game state generated when the normal symbol lottery is won.

In the case of winning the "normal pattern winning" by the normal pattern lottery, the normal pattern display device 60 is controlled to stop and display the normal pattern as the "normal pattern winning pattern".
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol display device 60 is controlled so as to stop and display the normal symbol as a "missing symbol".
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time saving control, the time for performing the variable display of normal symbols is shortened as compared with the time when the time saving control is stopped. In addition, during execution of the time saving control, the opening time of the normal electric accessary 52a is extended (the number of times of opening is increased) in the normal game state as compared with the time when the time saving control is stopped.
In the case of winning the "normal figure hit", the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each opening is 0 .5 [s] or 2.0 [s]. At this time, during execution of the time saving control, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 52a is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each opening is 2.0 [s ] is set. On the other hand, while the time saving control is stopped, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each opening is 0.5 [s]. is set to

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first start port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second start port 52. A special pattern lottery is executed.
As shown in FIG. 4(a), in the pachinko machine 1, as a result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, respectively), "big hit", "small hit", and "lost" , is set.
In the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the "jackpot" is set to 1/199, the probability of winning the "small hit" is set to 0/199, and the probability of being "lost" (lost) is set. , 198/199.
In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the "jackpot" is set to 1/199, the probability of winning the "small hit" is set to 198/199, and the probability of being "lost" (lost) is set. , is set to 0/199.
Then, when a "big win" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a big win game state is generated. In the jackpot game state, the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can be entered into the big winning device 53.例文帳に追加
Further, when a "small win" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a small winning game state is generated. In the small winning game state, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the entry of the game ball into the accessory winning device 54 becomes possible. Then, when the passage of the V area by the game ball entering the accessory winning device 54 is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, the big winning game state occurs after the small winning game state ends. be done.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), in this embodiment, "jackpot 1" and "jackpot 2" are set as the type of "jackpot" (winning type selected when winning the "jackpot"). there is
In this embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the selection probability (winning probability) of each winning type (various types of "jackpot") in the case of winning the "jackpot" is the same. is set.
Specifically, when a "jackpot" is won by a special symbol lottery, the probability of selecting "jackpot 1" is set to 40[%], and the probability of selecting "jackpot 2" is set to 60[%]. %].
Further, as shown in FIG. 4(c), in the present embodiment, as the type of "small hit" (winning type selected when winning the "small win"), "small win 1" to "small win 6” is set.
In the present embodiment, when the "small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, the probability that the "small win 1" is selected is set to 3 [%], and the "small win 2" is selected. The probability is set to 5 [%], the probability that "small hit 3" is selected is set to 12 [%], and the probability that "small hit 4" is selected is set to 10 [%] , the probability that "5 small wins" will be selected is set to 30[%], and the probability that "6 small wins" will be selected is set to 40[%].
In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery never wins a "small hit". However, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that a "small hit" can be won. In the case of such a configuration, in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the selection probability (winning probability) of each winning type (each type of "small winning") when winning the "small winning" may be the same or different from each other.

When "big hit 1" is won, the special pattern display devices 61 and 62 are controlled to stop and display the special pattern as "big hit 1 pattern". In addition, the control is performed so that the first to fourth performance symbols are stopped and displayed at "one big winning symbol".
When "big win 2" is won, the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 are controlled to stop and display the special symbol as "big win 2 symbol". In addition, the control is performed so that the first to fourth performance symbols are stopped and displayed with the “big hit 2 symbols”.
In this embodiment, the "jackpot 1 symbol" and the "jackpot 2 symbol" are identified by the same type of combination of the first to third effect symbols stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. Information (for example, "7, 7, 7") is arranged.

When "small hit 1" is won, the special symbol 2 display device 62 is controlled to stop and display the special symbol as "small hit 1 symbol". In addition, it controls so that the 1st performance design - the 4th performance design are stop-displayed with "small winning 1 design".
When "small win 2" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 is controlled to stop and display the special symbol as "small win 2 symbol". In addition, the control is performed so that the first effect pattern to the fourth effect pattern are stopped and displayed with "two small winning patterns".
When "small hit 3" is won, the special symbol 2 display device 62 is controlled to stop and display the special symbol as "small hit 3 symbol". In addition, the control is performed so that the first effect pattern to the fourth effect pattern are stopped and displayed with "small hit 3 patterns".
In the present embodiment, the “small winning 1 symbol” to “small winning 3 symbols” are the same combination of the first to third performance symbols stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. identification information (for example, "7, 7, 7").
When the "small win 4" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 is controlled to stop and display the special symbol as "small win 4". In addition, it controls so that the 1st performance design - the 4th performance design are stop-displayed with "small winning 4 designs".
When "small hit 5" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 is controlled to stop and display the special pattern with "small hit 5 pattern". In addition, the control is performed so that the first effect pattern to the fourth effect pattern are stopped and displayed with "5 small winning patterns".
When "small hit 6" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 is controlled to stop and display the special pattern as "small hit 6 pattern". In addition, control is performed so that the first production pattern to the fourth production pattern are stopped and displayed with "small winning 6 patterns".
In the present embodiment, the "small hit 4 symbols" to "small hit 6 symbols" are at least one of the first to third effect symbols stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. The type of the performance symbol is in a mode in which a combination (for example, "7, bell, 7") is different from the type of other performance symbols.

When "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 2" is won, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, when "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 2" is won, 5 round games are executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
In each round game, a predetermined maximum opening time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment) has passed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and a big prize during the round game The number of game balls entering the device 53 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (7 [balls] in this embodiment).
Further, when "jackpot 1" is won, time saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends. In this case, the time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state, and is ended according to the establishment of a predetermined time saving end condition.
In this embodiment, (1) winning a "jackpot" by a special symbol lottery, (2) detecting a V prize (passage of a game ball through a V area) during occurrence of a small winning game state, (3) ) That the total number of fluctuations executed during the time saving control has reached a predetermined first time saving number of times (100 [times] in this embodiment), (4) Special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time saving control When the number of times has reached a predetermined second number of times of time saving (in this embodiment, 4 [times]), when one of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied.
Here, the "total number of fluctuations" is the number of times of notification display of special symbols based on the first special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display), and the number of notification displays of special symbols based on the second special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display) and the total number of
"Special figure 2 fluctuation frequency" refers to the number of times of notification display (variation display and stop display) of special symbols based on the second special symbol lottery.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot 2" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) executed during the execution of the time saving control, the time saving control is performed after the jackpot gaming state ends. executed. In this case, the time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state, and is ended according to the establishment of the time saving end condition.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot 2" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) that is executed while the time saving control is stopped, the time saving control is performed after the jackpot game state ends. Not executed.

When "minor win 1" to "minor win 6" are won, a small win game is executed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) in a small win game state.
In each small winning game, the maximum opening time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment) set after the special electric accessory 54a is opened, and during the small winning game , the number of game balls entering the accessory winning device 54 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (7 [balls] in this embodiment).

In this embodiment, as the type of the small winning game, a game that can win a V prize and a game that cannot win a V prize are set.
"V winning possible game" is a type of small winning game in which a game ball entering the accessory winning device 54 during execution of the small winning game can (easily) pass through the V area. Specifically, in a V winning game, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state while the sorting means of the accessory winning device 54 is displaced to the V passing state. As a result, the game ball entering the accessory winning device 54 during execution of the V winning possible game is distributed to the V area by the distribution means and passes through the V area.
"V winning impossible game" is a type of small winning game in which it is impossible (difficult) for a game ball entering the accessory winning device 54 to pass through the V area during execution of the small winning game. . Specifically, in the V winning impossible game, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state while the sorting means of the accessory winning device 54 is displaced to the non-V passing state. As a result, the game ball entering the accessory winning device 54 during execution of the V winning impossible game is sorted to the discharge area by the sorting means and does not pass through the V area.
When "small winning 1" to "small winning 3" are won, the V winning possible game is included in the small winning game executed while the small winning game state is occurring. In this embodiment, when "small win 1" to "small win 3" are won, 1 [time] V winning possible game is executed during occurrence of the small win gaming state.
When "small winning 4" to "small winning 6" are won, the V winning possible game is not included in the small winning game executed during occurrence of the small winning game state. In this embodiment, when "small win 4" to "small win 6" are won, 1 [time] V winning impossible game is executed during occurrence of the small win gaming state.

When passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during occurrence of the small winning game state, the big winning game state is caused after the end of the small winning game state.
When "small win 1" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during occurrence of the small win game state, in the big win game state generated after the end of the small win game state, 15 [times] round games are executed.
When "small win 2" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, in the big win game state generated after the end of the small win game state, 10 [times] round games are executed.
When "small win 3" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, in the big win game state generated after the end of the small win game state, 5 [times] round games are executed.
When "small win 4" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, in the big win game state generated after the end of the small win game state, 15 [times] round games are executed.
When "small win 5" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, in the big win game state that occurs after the small win game state ends, 10 [times] round games are executed.
When "small win 6" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, in the big win game state that occurs after the small win game state ends, 5 [times] round games are executed.
As described above, in each round game, the predetermined maximum open time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment) has passed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and the round The number of game balls entering the big winning device 53 during the game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (7 [balls] in this embodiment).

In addition, when "small win 1" to "small win 6" are won and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, after the small win game state ends Time saving control is executed after the end of the generated jackpot game state. In this case, the time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state, and is ended according to the establishment of the time saving end condition.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 will be described.
The main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, and the communication from the effect control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 200 is Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 consists of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. there is
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control circuit 300 by serial communication. In the effect control circuit 300, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 include a symbol type designation command, a first variation pattern designation command, a second variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, and a game state designation. command, hold number designation command, opening designation command, round start designation command, round end designation command, ending designation command, V prize designation command, first look-ahead designation command, second look-ahead designation command, third look-ahead designation command, out designation A command, a right-handed notification start designation command, a right-handed notification end designation command, a time saving control start designation command, a time saving control end designation command, a continuous chan period start designation command, a consecutive chan period end designation command, etc. are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of special symbol stop symbol (lottery result of special symbol lottery). The symbol type specification command is a special symbol type of stop symbol, "lost symbol", "jackpot p symbol" (one of "jackpot 1 symbol" and "jackpot 2 symbols") or "small hit q symbol". Designate (one of "small hit 1 pattern" to "small hit 6 patterns"). The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, the symbol type specifying command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The first variation pattern specification command and the second variation pattern specification command are respectively commands for specifying the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the first variation pattern specification command and the second variation pattern specification command specify the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number respectively. .
The first variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first variation pattern") in the first half of the variation display of the performance symbols.
In this embodiment, m (plurality) kinds of first variation patterns are set, each of which is associated with a different variation time. Then, the first variation pattern specification command specifies one of the m kinds of first variation patterns.
The second variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "second variation pattern") in the latter half of the variation display of the performance symbols z1 and z2.
In this embodiment, n (plurality) kinds of second variation patterns are set, each of which is associated with a different variation time. Then, the second variation pattern specification command specifies one of the n kinds of second variation patterns.
The first variation pattern specification command and the second variation pattern specification command are transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display.

The stop designation command is a command that designates the stop display of the special symbol. The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of stop display of special symbols. The stop designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
The "game state offset value" is information specifying the game state. In this embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the last big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit, each combination A corresponding number is set.
The game state designation command designates one game state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special game phase, which will be described later, or the like.

The pending number designation command is a command for designating the pending number. In this embodiment, the pending number designation command specifies that the pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1", the pending number has decreased by "1", the pending number etc. .
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device 61 is reserved. In addition, the "special figure 2 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device 62 is reserved.
The reserved number designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the start information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the like. In this embodiment, as the reserved number designation command, those corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the opening period of the jackpot game state or the opening period of the small hit game state). The opening designation command is the type of the jackpot game state to start (one of "small hit 1 continuous jackpot" to "small hit 6 continuous jackpot", "jackpot 1" and "jackpot 2") or a small hit game to start Specify the type of state (one of "small win 1" to "small win 6"). The opening specification command is transmitted at the start of the opening period.
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of the round game or the start of the small winning game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game or at the start of the small winning game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round game or the end of the small winning game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game or at the end of the small winning game.
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period (the ending period of the jackpot game state or the ending period of the small hit game state). The ending specifying command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command for designating passage of the V area by the game ball (V winning). The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the type of the stop design of the special design. The first look-ahead designation command is, as the type of stop pattern of the special pattern, "lost pattern", "jackpot p pattern" (one of "jackpot 1 pattern" and "jackpot 2 patterns") or "small hit q pattern" ”(One of “1 pattern for small hit” to “6 patterns for small hit”). In this embodiment, the first prefetch designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the first variation pattern. Specifically, the second prefetch designation command is that the variation pattern is undefined (“variation pattern undefined”) or one of the m types of first variation pattern types (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern m ”). The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when the start information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the second variation pattern. Specifically, the third prefetch designation command is that the second variation pattern is undefined (“variation pattern undefined”) or one of n types of second variation pattern types (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”). The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when the start information is stored.
The out designation command is a command for designating entry (ejection) of game balls to the out ports 58 and 59 . The out designation command is transmitted according to the input of the detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109 .
A hitting to the right information start specification command is a command which specifies the start of hitting to the right information. The hitting-to-right notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of hitting-to-right notification.
The hitting-to-the-right notification end designation command is a command for specifying the end of hitting-to-the-right notification. The right-handed notification end designation command is transmitted when the right-handed notification ends.
A time saving control start designation|designated command is a command which designates the start of time saving control. The time saving control start designation command is transmitted at the time of starting the time saving control.
A time saving control end specification command is a command which specifies the end of time saving control. The time saving control end designation command is transmitted at the end of the time saving control.
The consecutive playing period start designation command is a command for designating the start of the consecutive playing period. The consecutive playing period start designation command is transmitted at the start of the consecutive playing period.
The consecutive playing period end designation command is a command for designating the end of the consecutive playing period. The consecutive playing period end designation command is transmitted at the end of the consecutive playing period.

The main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is bidirectional. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 consists of 1-byte data.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400 by serial communication. In the payout control circuit 400, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a control command to the main control circuit 200 through serial communication. In the main control circuit 200, when a control command is received from the payout control circuit 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400, a command for specifying the number of winning balls and the like are set.
The prize number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number-of-prizing-balls designation command designates the payout of n (n=2, 3, 4, or 10) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control circuit 400 executes the prize ball payout operation.
In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200 include occurrence/cancellation of an error during payout, occurrence/cancellation of a full-tank error, occurrence/cancellation of a jammed ball error, and the like. A control command specifying each is set. Each control command is sent upon detection of occurrence/release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control circuit 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control circuit 200 will be described.
First, the functions of hardware configured in the main control circuit 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hard random number generation circuit 270 generates a value within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) by "1". Then, by the hardware random number update process, the winning random numbers of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random numbers of the first special symbol lottery, and the jackpot random numbers of the second special symbol lottery are respectively updated. The hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the hardware random number generation circuit 270 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.
Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the transmission shift register of the output port 1 (output port 250) transmits the control command stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control circuit 300. Start processing. Note that the control command transmission process is executed as a function of the output port 1 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, the game control processing executed by the CPU 210 of the main control circuit 200 based on the program (software) relating to the progress of the game stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, settings necessary for executing various processes are performed.
Specifically, in the initialization process, the top address of the stack area is set in the stack pointer. Also, as the interrupt mode, a vector system interrupt mode is set.
In step S1-2, wait time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait time setting process, a predetermined wait process time is set in a timer counter. Then, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, RAM clear signal read processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-4. In the RAM clear signal read processing, a RAM clear signal is read.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a ram clear switch (not shown). When the power is turned on while the ram clear switch is pressed, a ram clear signal is input to the input port 240 (input port 0).
In the RAM clear signal read processing, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear signal of the input port 240 is read.

In step S1-4, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has passed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has passed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-5, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of step S1-4 is repeated.
In step S1-5, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protection value in a predetermined area of RAM 230 . As a result, the CPU 210 is permitted to access the work area of the RAM 230 (including the use-prohibited area and the stack area).
In step S1-6, based on the value read in step S1-3 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear signal), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal is input. If it is determined that the ram clear signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S1-7, and if it is determined that the ram clear signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-16.

In step S1-7, it is determined whether or not the power shutdown occurrence information is stored in the power shutdown occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that the power shutdown occurrence information is stored (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S1-8 and it is determined that the power shutdown occurrence information is not stored (No), the process proceeds to step S1-16.
In step S1-8, checksum calculation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-9. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Here, the "backup information" is stored in all areas of the work area of the RAM 230 (the work area including the prohibited area and the stack area) except for the power interruption occurrence information flag area and the checksum buffer area. Information.
In step S1-9, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-8 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-10, If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-16.
Here, if the checksum value calculated in step S1-8 matches the checksum value stored in the checksum buffer area, it is determined that the checksum is normal, and step S1 If the checksum value calculated in -8 does not match the checksum value stored in the checksum buffer area, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-10, a power shutdown occurrence information release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-11. In the power-off occurrence information cancellation process, the power-off occurrence information set in the power-off occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230 is canceled (erased).
In step S1-11, game state return processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-12. In the game state return process, based on the backup information, various values are set in the work area of the RAM 230 to restore the game state when the occurrence of the power cutoff is detected.
Specifically, in the game state return process, based on the backup information, various flags (time saving control flag, V winning flag, previous big hit pattern flag, special game phase flag, normal game phase flag, etc.) values are set. , Set the value of various counters (revolution counter after jackpot, etc.).
As a result, based on the backup information, the information stored in the RAM 230 is restored to the state when the occurrence of the power shutdown was detected.
In step S1-12, subcommand transmission processing at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-13. In the subcommand transmission process at the time of power recovery, a subcommand (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300) specifying that the power has recovered is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. do.
In step S1-13, a payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery, a payout command (a control command sent from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400) specifying that the power has recovered is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. do.

In step S1-14, a subcommand transmission process for effect return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the effect start subcommand transmission process, a subcommand for effect return (power return phase designation command, game state designation command, etc.) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Here, the "power return time phase designation command" is a control command that designates a special game phase for restoring the effect.
In the effect return subcommand transmission process, first, the current special game phase is confirmed based on the value of the special game phase flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . Then, the confirmed special game phase is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 at the time of power return phase designation command.
Also, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. Specifically, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning prize flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the confirmation result is corresponded. Calculate the game state offset value. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-15, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the main loop process (step S2-1) is performed. In the interrupt initial setting processing, initial setting of a CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is performed.
Specifically, the CPU 210 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) in the CTC.

In step S1-16, RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the RAM clear processing, the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the RAM clearing process, information stored in the RAM 230 (excluding the prohibited area) is cleared (erased). As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 230 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents thereof are erased.
Specifically, in a predetermined area of the RAM 230, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of various flags (time saving control flag, V winning flag, previous big hit symbol flag, special game phase flag, normal game phase flag, etc.). A predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of various counters (post-jackpot rotation counter, etc.).
In step S1-17, RAM clear subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-18. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand specifying that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S1-18, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the payout command transmission process at the time of RAM clearing, a payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
After completing the CPU initialization process (step S1-15) shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. When the main loop process is started, first, the process moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (performing pattern random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

At step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control circuit 400 (control command sent from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200) is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 250 (output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
At step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, the execution of the saving process at power shutdown, the timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. This is the interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, another random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the soft random numbers excluding the winning pattern random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the saving process at power-off.
A power cutoff detection circuit (not shown) is connected to the power supply circuit 600 . The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied by the power supply circuit 600, and outputs a power cutoff notice signal to the main control circuit 300 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value. .
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 7 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. When the power-off saving process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S3-2, power-off notice signal read processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input. If (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 250 (output port 0 to output port 2) is stopped. Also, the input of the detection signal to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3) is stopped.
In step S3-5, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated for information stored in all areas of the work area of the RAM 230 excluding the power shutdown occurrence information flag area and the checksum buffer area. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-6, a power shutdown occurrence information setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the power-off occurrence information setting process, the power-off occurrence information is set (saved) in the power-off occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition processing, processing for prohibiting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the CPU 210 is prohibited from accessing the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 .

At step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of power-off notice signal reading times is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, power-off notice signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal), whether the power cutoff notice signal is input from the power cutoff detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes). goes to step S3-8.
In step S3-11, loop counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the return determination loop counter is newly set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The frequency generation circuit 260 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt period (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 8 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop processing. When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission processing, interrupts are permitted.
In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. In the dynamic port output process, a control signal is output to each display device 60-63 (each LED).
Specifically, in the dynamic port output process, drive information (drive signal) set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the output port 250 (output port 0). As a result, the display devices 60 to 63 (each LED) are controlled to be lit according to the dynamic lighting method based on the drive signal set in the dynamic port output request buffer.

In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. Port input processing accurately captures the latest switch state.
Here, the RAM 230 is set with an input port 0 state flag area, an input port 1 state flag area, and an input port 2 state flag area.
The input port 0 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to input port 0 . In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data indicating the switch state (signal input state or signal not input state) of the signal (detection sensor) corresponding to the switch state storage area is stored. "1" or "0") is set.
Specifically, each switch state storage area is set to "1" when the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input, and the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes "0" is set.
In this embodiment, the input port 0 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor, a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from each magnetic detection sensor, and a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the vibration detection sensor. A switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of, a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor, a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the glass frame open sensor, and a RAM clear switch and a switch state storage area corresponding to a RAM clear signal from.

The input port 1 status flag area includes switch status storage areas corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 1 . 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating the switch state of the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is set in each switch state storage area.
Specifically, each switch state storage area is set to "1" when the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input, and the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes "0" is set.
In this embodiment, the input port 1 state flag area is a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the prize winning ball detection sensor 103 and a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the prize winning ball detection sensor 105. , the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106, the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107, and the V winning ball detection sensor 108. It includes a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal and a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109 .

The input port 2 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 2 . Each switch state storage area is set with 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating the switch state of the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area.
Specifically, each switch state storage area is set to "1" when the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input, and the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes "0" is set.
In this embodiment, the input port 2 state flag area is a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101, and a switch status storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. It includes a state storage area, a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the normal starting ball detection sensor 104, and a switch state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit. there is

In addition, an input port 1 ON detection flag area and an input port 2 ON detection flag area are set in the RAM 230 .
The input port 1 ON detection flag area includes an ON state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 1 . Each ON state storage area is set with 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating whether or not the ON state is detected for the signal corresponding to the ON state storage area.
Specifically, each on-state storage area is set to "1" when the on-state of the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is detected, and the on-state of the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is set. When not detected, "0" is set.
Here, the "on state" refers to a state in which the signal is not input to the signal is being input.
In this embodiment, the input port 1 ON detection flag area includes an ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103 and an ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the winning ball detection sensor 105. an ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106; an ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107; and an on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out-ball detection sensor 109 .
In the following description, the value set (stored) in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the prize winning ball detection sensor 103 is referred to as "big prize opening switch bit data". The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of is set as "character switch bit data", and the value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106 is set as "left other winning opening switch bit data", and the value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107 is defined as "right other winning opening switch bit data", and V winning The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 108 is set as "V winning switch bit data", and the value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109. The value that is stored is called "out switch bit data".
That is, the input port 1 ON detection flag (the value set in the input port 1 ON detection flag area) consists of the big winning opening switch bit data, the accessory switch bit data, the left other winning opening switch bit data, and the right winning opening switch bit data. It includes other winning opening switch bit data, V winning switch bit data, and out switch bit data.

The input port 2 ON detection flag area includes ON state storage areas corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 2 . Each ON state storage area is set with 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating whether or not the ON state is detected for the signal corresponding to the ON state storage area.
Specifically, each on-state storage area is set to "1" when the on-state of the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is detected, and the on-state of the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is set. When not detected, "0" is set.
In this embodiment, the input port 2 ON detection flag area corresponds to the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 and the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. An on-state storage area, an on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the normal figure starting ball detection sensor 104, and an on-state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit. ing.
In the following description, the value set (stored) in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is referred to as "first starting opening switch bit data", and the special figure 2 starting ball The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the detection sensor 102 is set as the "second starting opening switch bit data", and the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the normal figure starting ball detection sensor 104. is set to "gate switch bit data", and the value set to the ON state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit is set to "power cutoff switch bit data".
That is, the input port 2 ON detection flag (the value set in the input port 2 ON detection flag area) consists of the first starting point switch bit data, the second starting point switch bit data, the gate switch bit data, the power supply cut-off switch bit data;

In the port input process, first, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of input port 0 is read. Based on the read value, the value of each switch state storage area in the input port 0 state flag area is updated.
Specifically, when "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, "1" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal is set to "1". If "0" is set in the area, "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.

Next, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 1 is read. Then, based on the read value and the value set in each switch state storage area of the input port 1 state flag area (the value set in the previous process related to step S4-4), the input port 1 is turned on. Update the value (each switch bit data) of each ON state storage area in the detection flag area.
Specifically, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal (the value set in the previous process related to step S4-4) and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal Check the set value and . For each signal, when "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, the signal "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal, and in other cases, "0" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal.
Here, "in other cases" means that "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "0" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. , the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal is set to "1" and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal is set to "0", and the switch state corresponding to the signal It refers to the case where "1" is set in the storage area and "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal.
Next, based on the read values (the values set in the reception storage areas corresponding to the signals of input port 1), the values in the switch status storage areas of the input port 1 status flag area are updated.
Specifically, when "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, "1" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal is set to "1". If "0" is set in the area, "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.
As described above, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area in the previous step S4-4 is "0", and the value set in the switch state storage area in this step S4-4 is " If it is "1", "1" is set in the on-state storage area (the on-state is detected) in this step S4-4.

Next, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 2 is read. Then, based on the read value and the value set in each switch state storage area of the input port 2 state flag area (the value set in the previous processing related to step S4-4), the input port 2 is turned on. Update the value (switch bit data) of each ON state storage area in the detection flag area.
Specifically, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal (the value set in the previous process related to step S4-4) and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal Check the set value and . For each signal, when "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, the signal "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal, and in other cases, "0" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal.
Here, "other cases" means that "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "0" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. , the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal is set to "1" and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal is set to "0", and the switch state corresponding to the signal It refers to the case where "1" is set in the storage area and "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal.
Next, based on the read values (the values set in the reception storage areas corresponding to the signals of input port 2), the values in the switch status storage areas of the input port 2 status flag area are updated.
Specifically, when "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, "1" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal is set to "1". If "0" is set in the area, "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.
As described above, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area in the previous step S4-4 is "0", and the value set in the switch state storage area in this step S4-4 is " If it is "1", "1" is set in the on-state storage area (the on-state is detected) in this step S4-4.

At step S4-5, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the timer update process, various timers are updated. Specifically, in the timer update process, the value of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, external information timer, error timer, etc.) is updated.
At step S4-6, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-7. The initial value random number update process in step S4-6 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2. Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-7, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-8. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-8, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-9. In the switch management process, a process (such as acquisition of various random numbers) is executed according to the state of each starting ball detection sensor 101, 102, 104 (whether or not an ON state is detected). The switch management processing will be described later.
At step S4-9, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 and the operation of the special electric accessary products 53a and 54a are managed. Special game management processing will be described later.
In step S4-10, normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. In the ordinary game management process, the operation of the ordinary diagram display device 60 and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-11, error management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the error management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination result.

At step S4-12, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the prize-winning switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the states of the detection sensors 101 to 103, 105 to 107, and 109 (whether or not ON state is detected).
Specifically, in the winning opening switch process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the big winning ball detection sensor 103 has been detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the big winning ball detection sensor 103 is detected, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 1, which will be described later, is newly added to the prize ball control counter. Set to 1.
In the winning opening switch process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105 has been detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the prize ball detection sensor 105 is detected, the value set in the prize ball control counter 1 plus "1" is newly added to the prize ball control counter 1. set to
In the winning opening switch process, next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left other winning ball detection sensor 106 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the upper left other prize ball detection sensor 106 is detected, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 2, which will be described later, is newly controlled. Set counter 2.
In the winning opening switch process, next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right other winning ball detection sensor 107 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the right other prize ball detection sensor 107 is detected, the value set in the prize ball control counter 2 plus "1" is newly added to the prize ball control counter 2. set to
In the winning opening switch process, next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 3 described later is newly added to the prize ball. Set control counter 3. Also, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected, the value set in the external information starting port counter plus "1" is newly added to the external information Set to start counter.
In the winning opening switch process, next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 4 described later is newly added to the prize ball. Set to control counter 4. Also, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, the value set in the external information starting port counter plus "1" is newly added to the external information Set to start counter.
In the winning opening switch process, next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the out switch counter for external information is added to the out switch counter for external information. set to

At step S4-13, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-12, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In this embodiment, as prize ball control counters, a prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the prize winning devices 53 and 54, and the number of ball game balls that have entered the other prize winning openings 55 to 57 are stored. Stored prize ball control counter 2, prize ball control counter 3 storing the number of ball game balls entering the first starting port 51, and the number of ball game balls entering the second starting port 52 are stored. A prize ball control counter 4 is set.

Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 . After that, when the game ball payout device 440 completes the payout of the prize balls, the payout control circuit 400 transmits to the main control circuit 200 a main command designating the completion of the payout. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (10 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (2 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

In step S4-14, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. The firing position designation management process will be described later.
At step S4-15, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to hall computer 700 is set.
Specifically, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information starting port counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [sphere] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information starting hole counter has reached a predetermined value, external information indicating that the number of balls entering the starting holes 51 and 52 has reached a predetermined number is sent to the RAM 230 port. Store in the output request buffer. After that, a predetermined value (1 [sphere] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting port counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information OUT switch counter has reached a predetermined value. When it is determined that the value of the out switch counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, external information indicating that the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 109 has reached a predetermined number is stored in the RAM 230. Store in port output request buffer. After that, a predetermined value is subtracted from the value of the external information OUT switch counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information timer (timer counter) is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the external information timer is equal to or greater than "1", external information indicating the occurrence of an abnormal state is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. FIG.

In step S4-16, test signal management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the test signal management process, test information (test signal) is set.
Specifically, in the test signal management process, test information indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, small game state, execution state of time saving control, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
At step S4-17, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the LED display setting process, driving information (driving signal) for lighting control of each display device 60 to 63 (each LED) is set in the dynamic port output request buffer of RAM 230 .
At step S4-18, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the solenoid data setting process, drive information (drive signal) to be output to each solenoid 64 to 67 is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230 .

In step S4-19, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In port output processing, various signals are output to hall computer 700, solenoids 64 to 67, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 250 (output port 0). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer 700 via the payout control circuit 400 and the external terminal board 420 . Further, each solenoid 64 to 67 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-20, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, switch management processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 9, the process first proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the normal pattern starting ball detection sensor 104 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the normal pattern starting ball detection sensor 104 is detected (Yes), step If the process proceeds to S5-2 and it is determined that the ON state of the normal chart starting ball detection sensor 104 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
Here, when "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the normal chart starting ball detection sensor 104 (when the gate switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is "1") , when it is determined that the ON state of the normal pattern starting ball detection sensor 104 is detected, and "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the normal pattern starting ball detection sensor 104 (input port 2 When the gate switch bit data of the on detection flag is "0"), it is determined that the on state of the normal figure starting ball detection sensor 104 is not detected.
In step S5-2, normal chart starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. Normal figure starting ball detection processing will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected (Yes) , If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
Here, when "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 (the first starting port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is "1" ), it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected, and "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101. If it is (when the first starting port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is "0"), it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is not detected.
In step S5-4, a special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected (Yes) , If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-6.
Here, when "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 (the second starting port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is "1" ), it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, and "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. If it is (when the second starting port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is "0"), it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is not detected.
In step S5-6, a special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 has been detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 has been detected (Yes), step S5- 8, and when it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-9.
Here, when "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 (when the V winning switch bit data of the input port 1 ON detection flag is "1") , when it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is detected, and "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 (input port 1 ON When the V winning switch bit data of the detection flag is "0"), it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is not detected.
At step S5-8, V winning ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-9. In the V winning detection process, first, it is determined whether or not a small winning game state is occurring.
Then, when it is determined that the small winning game state is occurring, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230. - 特許庁Also, the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the small winning game state is not occurring, the process is ended and the process proceeds to the next process.
Here, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, is the special game phase related to the small winning game state ("pre-release state", "release control state"). , "Accessory closed effective state" or "Accessory open end wait state"), it is determined that a small winning game state is occurring, and a value corresponding to another special game phase In the case of , it is determined that the small winning game state is not occurring.

In step S5-9, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 has been detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-10. If it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 has not been detected (No), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S4-9) is performed.
Here, when "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the out ball detection sensor 109 (when the out switch bit data of the input port 1 ON detection flag is "1"), , when it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 has been detected, and "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the out ball detection sensor 109 (out of the input port 1 ON detection flag If the switch bit data is "0"), it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 has not been detected.
In step S5-10, an out-ball detection process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9). In the out ball detection process, the out designation command is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, normal figure starting ball detection processing in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the normal pattern starting ball detection process.
When the normal chart starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 10, the process first proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, normal figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the general pattern random number acquisition process, a random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is the upper limit ("1" in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- 3).
In step S6-3, normal figure pending number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the general pattern reservation number counter update process, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the general pattern reservation number counter is newly set to the general pattern reservation number counter.
In step S6-4, the general pattern random number storage process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the general pattern random number storage process, the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the general pattern start information storage area of the RAM 230 as the general pattern start information.

Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 11, the process first proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 .
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 1 pending number counter is set.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 12, the process first proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value area of the RAM 230 .
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 2 pending number counter is set.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process of steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 13, the process first proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure reservation number acquisition process, the value of the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area (special figure 1 reservation Get (load) the number or special figure 2 pending number).
In step S9-3, a special random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are obtained (loaded) from loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, the number of reserved special figures acquired in step S9-2 (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). Then, if it is determined that the number of special figures pending is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of special figures pending is the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7).

In step S9-5, a special figure pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure pending number counter update process, the value set in the special figure pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending number counter) specified by the address set in the pending number counter address area The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set to the special figure pending number counter.
In step S9-6, a special random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start Information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area).
At this time, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, various random numbers (special figure 1 start information) are stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. Then, when the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers (special figure 2 start information) are stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area.

In step S9-7, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the pending number designation command setting process, a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 do.
At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a reservation number designation command that specifies that the special figure 2 reservation number has increased by "1", RAM 230 subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a preliminary determination process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7). In the advance determination process, based on the start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined start information") stored in the special figure start information storage area in step S9-6, Preliminary determination of various lottery results.
In this embodiment, for the start information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the first prefetch designation command based on the start information, The second prefetch designation command and the third prefetch designation command are not transmitted.
In addition, for the special figure 2 start information acquired (stored) during the stop of the time saving control, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the first look-ahead designation command based on the start information, the second look-ahead designation command and The third prefetch designation command is not sent.
Furthermore, for the special figure 1 start information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control, the pre-determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the first look-ahead designation command based on the start information, the second look-ahead designation command and The third prefetch designation command is not sent.
As described above, when the special figure 1 start information is acquired (stored) during the non-occurrence of the jackpot game state and the small hit game state, and during the stop of the time saving control, various lotteries based on the start information Pre-determination of the result is executed, and a first pre-reading designation command, a second pre-reading designation command, and a third pre-reading designation command are transmitted according to the result of the pre-determination.
In addition, when the special figure 2 starting information is acquired (stored) during the non-occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, and during the execution of the time saving control, based on the starting information, various lottery results is executed, and a first prefetching designation command, a second prefetching designation command, and a third prefetching designation command are transmitted according to the result of the predetermination.
It should be noted that, for all the acquired (stored) starting information, a configuration may be adopted in which preliminary determination of various lottery results is executed.

In the preliminary determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is occurring (hereinafter referred to as "first determination"). Here, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, is the special game phase related to the jackpot game state ("large winning opening pre-open state", "large winning opening opening control state" , ``Large winning opening closing valid state'' or ``Large winning opening closing wait state''), it is determined that a jackpot game state is occurring, and other special game phases are supported. If it is a value that does, it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is not occurring.
When it is determined by the first determination that the jackpot gaming state is occurring, the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or step S5-7).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the first determination that the big winning game state is not occurring, it is further determined whether or not the small winning gaming state is occurring (hereinafter referred to as "second determination"). Here, the value (special game phase) that is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is the special game phase related to the small winning game state ("pre-release state", "release control state", " If it is a value corresponding to "accessory closed valid state" or "accessory open end wait state"), it is determined that a small winning game state is occurring, and it is a value corresponding to another special game phase. In this case, it is determined that the small winning game state is not occurring.
When it is determined by the second determination that the small winning gaming state is occurring, the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or step S5-7).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the second determination that the small winning game state is not occurring, it is further determined whether or not the time saving control is being executed (hereinafter referred to as "third determination"). Here, in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230, if "1" is set, it is determined that the time-saving control is being executed, and if "0" is set, the time-saving control is executed. Determine not inside.
If it is determined that the time saving control is not being executed by the third determination, further determines whether or not the pre-determined start information stored in step S9-7 is the special figure 1 start information (hereinafter, "the 4 Judgment”).
When it determines with the prior determination starting information being special figure 1 starting information by 4th determination, the lottery result prior determination process mentioned later is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance determination start information is not special figure 1 start information (it is special figure 2 start information) by the third determination, the process is terminated and the next process (step S5-5 or step S5 -7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving control is being executed by the third determination, further determines whether or not the pre-determined start information stored in step S9-7 is the special figure 2 start information (hereinafter , “fifth judgment”).
When it determines with the prior determination start information being special figure 2 start information by 5th determination, the lottery result prior determination process mentioned later is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the preliminary determination start information is not special figure 2 start information (it is special figure 1 start information) by the fifth determination, the process is terminated and the next process (step S5-5 or step S5 -7).

Next, the lottery result pre-determination process will be described.
In the lottery result preliminary determination process, first, the preliminary special symbol hit/loss determination process for determining the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss") is executed.
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big winning lottery table in which the big winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered and a special symbol small winning lottery table in which the small winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered.
In the advance special figure hit-loss determination process, first, based on the jackpot random number included in the advance determination start information and the special figure jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot" (preliminary Jackpot judgment).
Specifically, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the advance determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery ” (winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the advance determination start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, then the jackpot included in the advance determination start information Based on the random number and the special symbol small winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is "small winning" (preliminary small winning determination).
Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the advance determination start information matches the small hit value registered in the special small winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery It is judged as "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the advance determination start information does not match the small hit value registered in the special small winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "missed". (Defeated).

In the lottery result preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special symbol stop symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol stop symbol (stop symbol number) is executed.
A ROM 220 stores a jackpot pattern lottery table in which correspondence between a jackpot pattern random number value and a jackpot pattern type ("jackpot 1 pattern" or "jackpot 2 patterns") is registered.
In addition, the ROM 220 stores a small winning symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the type of the small winning symbol ("1 small winning symbol" to "6 small winning symbols") is registered. there is
In the prior special figure stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by prior special figure winning/losing determination, the type of big winning symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type of the jackpot pattern (stop pattern number) is determined based on the jackpot pattern random number included in the advance determination start information and the jackpot pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, in the preliminary special figure stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the preliminary special figure winning/losing determination, the type of the small winning symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type of the small winning design (stop design number) is determined based on the winning design random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the small winning design lottery table.
On the other hand, in the preliminary special figure stop design determination process, when it is determined as "lost" (lost) by the preliminary special figure win-loss determination, "lost design" is determined as the type of stop design (stop design number).

In the lottery result preliminary determination process, next, the first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first prefetch designation command setting process, the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 stores a first prefetch designation command that designates the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination.

In the lottery result preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special figure variation pattern determination process for determining the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed.
In the advance special figure variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the prior determination start information is the special figure 1 start information. And, when it is determined that the prior determination starting information is the special figure 1 starting information, the prior special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prior determination start information is not the special figure 1 start information (it is the special figure 2 start information), the prior special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is executed.

In advance special figure 1 fluctuation pattern decision processing, first, the classification of fluctuation pattern random number which is included in advance decision start information (special figure 1 start information) is decided.
The ROM 220 stores a random number classification lottery table in which correspondences between variation pattern random numbers and categories of variation pattern random numbers are registered.
In addition, as a random number classification lottery table, a random number classification lottery table corresponding to the case where it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by preliminary special prize winning judgment, and a losing by preliminary special prize winning judgment (" and a random number classification lottery table corresponding to the case where it is determined to be "lost").
Only "fixed value" is registered in the winning random number classification lottery table as the classification of the variable pattern random numbers. On the other hand, "indefinite value" and "fixed value" are registered in the random number classification lottery table at the time of failure as classifications of fluctuation pattern random numbers.
"Indefinite value" means that the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is not determined at the time of storage (acquisition) of the start information (special figure 1 start information), and the start of the special symbol variation display based on the start information (When executing step S11-7), based on the number of reservations (special figure 1 number of reservations) at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, etc. Variation pattern in which the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined It is divided into random numbers.
The "fixed value" is, regardless of the number of reservations at the start of the special symbol variable display (when executing step S11-7), when storing the starting information (special figure 1 starting information) (of step S9-8 At the time of execution), it is a division of the variation pattern random number for which the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
In this embodiment, the value of the variation pattern random number is updated within the range of "0" to "1999". In the winning random number classification lottery table, all the fluctuation pattern random numbers from "0" to "1999" are "fixed values". On the other hand, in the random number classification lottery table at the time of failure, the value of the variation pattern random number in the range of "0" to "1700" is set to "undefined value", and the value of the variation pattern random number in the range of "1701" to "1999" is " fixed value”.

Then, in the pre-special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, if it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) Based on the variation pattern random number and the winning random number category lottery table, the variation pattern random number category is determined (in this case, it is determined as a “fixed value”).
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated ("missing") by the pre-special figure winning/losing determination, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) and the random number classification lottery table at the time of defeat, Based on this, the classification of the variation pattern random numbers is determined.

In the advance special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, next, the contents of the first variation pattern are determined.
The ROM 220 stores a special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is registered.
Also, as a special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table, when it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by pre-special figure winning judgment (or special figure winning judgment described later) When winning The special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table and the special figure 1 first variation pattern at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where it is determined to be lost ("missing") by the special figure winning/losing determination (or the special figure winning/losing determination described later) A lottery table and are stored.
In addition, as a special figure 1 first fluctuation pattern lottery table when losing, a special figure 1 first fluctuation pattern lottery table for undefined values when losing, corresponding to the case where the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number is an undefined value, and a classification of the fluctuation pattern random number A special figure 1 first fluctuation pattern lottery table for fixed value at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where is a fixed value is stored.
Furthermore, in the ROM 220, as a special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for undefined value when losing, a special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for undefined value when losing corresponding to each reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) stored.
Then, so that the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern with a shorter variation time is determined as the number of reservations increases, the special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for undefined values at the time of defeat corresponding to each number of reservations content is set.

Then, in the pre-special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, if it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) The type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number and the winning special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, it was determined to be unsuccessful ("missing") by pre-special figure hit-loss determination, and the variation pattern random number category included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) was determined to be a "fixed value" In the case, based on the variation pattern random number included in the advance determination start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for fixed value when losing, the type of the first variation pattern ( fluctuation pattern number).
On the other hand, it was determined to be unsuccessful ("missing") by the pre-special figure hit/loss determination, and the variation pattern random number category included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) was determined to be "indefinite value" In this case, "undefined variation pattern" is determined as the content of the first variation pattern.

In advance special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment processing, next, the contents of the second fluctuation pattern are judged.
The ROM 220 stores a special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is registered.
Also, as a special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table, when winning ("big hit" or "small hit") is determined by prior special figure winning judgment (or special figure winning judgment described later) When winning Special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table and special figure 1 second variation pattern at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where it is determined to be lost ("missing") by prior special figure winning judgment (or special figure winning judgment described later) A lottery table and are stored.
In addition, as a special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table when losing, a special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for indefinite values when losing, corresponding to the case where the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number is an indefinite value, and a classification of the fluctuation pattern random number A special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for fixed value at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where is a fixed value is stored.
Furthermore, in the ROM220, as a special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for undefined values when losing, the number of reservations (special figure 1 number of reservations) and the execution status of time saving control (executing or stopping) A combination of A special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for indeterminate value at the time of defeat corresponding to each is stored.
Then, so that the type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern with a shorter variation time is determined as the number of reservations increases, the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for undefined values at the time of defeat corresponding to each number of reservations content is set.

Here, in the winning special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table, the type (variation pattern number) belonging to the "reach variation pattern" is registered as the type of the second variation pattern.
A “reach variation pattern” is a variation pattern in which a predetermined reach effect image is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23 after the drum-type display device 24 forms the reach state.
The “reach state” means that the same kind of production pattern (identification information) is displayed (stopped or temporarily stopped) at a predetermined stop position of the left drum 23a and a predetermined stop position of the right drum 23c, and the center drum 23b rotates (first stop). 2) refers to the state in which the variable display of the production pattern) continues.
On the other hand, in the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for indeterminate value at the time of defeat, as the type of the second variation pattern, the type (variation pattern number) belonging to the "normal variation pattern" and the type belonging to the "reach variation pattern" (variation pattern number) and are registered.
On the other hand, in the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for fixed values at the time of defeat, only the type (variation pattern number) belonging to the "reach variation pattern" is registered as the type of the second variation pattern ("normal variation The type (variation pattern number) belonging to "Pattern" is not registered).

Then, in the pre-special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, if it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) The type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number and the winning special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, it was determined to be unsuccessful ("missing") by the pre-special figure hit/loss determination, and the variation pattern random number category included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) was determined to be a "fixed value" In the case, based on the variation pattern random number included in the advance determination start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for the fixed value when losing, the type of the second variation pattern ( fluctuation pattern number).
On the other hand, it was determined to be unsuccessful ("missing") by pre-special figure hit-loss determination, and the variation pattern random number category included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) was determined to be "indefinite value" In this case, "undefined variation pattern" is determined as the content of the second variation pattern.

On the other hand, in the advance special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, first, the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is registered.
Also, as a special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table, when it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by pre-special figure winning judgment (or special figure winning judgment described later) When winning The special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table and the special figure 2 first variation pattern at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where it is determined to be lost ("missing") by the special figure winning/losing determination (or the special figure winning/losing determination described later) A lottery table and are stored.
Then, in the pre-special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, if it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) The type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number and the winning special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated ("missing") by pre-special figure hit/loss determination, the variation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) and the special figure 2 first variation pattern when losing The type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is determined based on the lottery table.

In advance special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing, next, the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is registered.
Also, as a special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table, when it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by pre-special figure winning judgment (or special figure winning judgment described later) When winning Special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table and special figure 2 second variation pattern at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where it is determined to be lost ("missing") by prior special figure winning judgment (or special figure winning judgment described later) A lottery table and are stored.
Then, in the pre-special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, if it is determined to be elected ("big hit" or "small hit") by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) The type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number and the winning special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated ("missing") by the pre-special figure hit/loss determination, the variation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) and the special figure 2 second variation pattern at the time of defeat The type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern is determined based on the lottery table.

Here, for all the first variation pattern types registered in the special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for undefined values at the time of defeat corresponding during the execution of time saving control, the same (substantially the same) variation time corresponds attached.
In addition, in all the types of the second variation pattern registered in the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for undefined value at the time of defeat corresponding during the execution of time saving control, the same (substantially the same) variation time is associated It is
In addition, the same (substantially the same) variation time is associated with all the first variation pattern types registered in the special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table.
Furthermore, in the classification of all the second variation patterns registered in the special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table, the same (substantially the same) variation time is associated.
In particular, all the first variation pattern types registered in the special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for undefined values at the time of defeat corresponding to the execution of time saving control, and registered in the special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table The same (substantially the same) variation time is associated with all the first variation pattern types.
In addition, all the types of the second variation patterns registered in the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for undefined values during the execution of time saving control, and registered in the special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table The same (substantially the same) variation time is associated with all the second variation pattern types.

In the lottery result preliminary determination process, next, the second and third prefetch designation command setting processes are executed, the lottery result preliminary determination process ends, and the next process (step S5-5 or step S5-7) is performed. do.
In the second and third look-ahead specification command setting processing, the second look-ahead specification that specifies the contents of the first variation pattern ("variation pattern number" or "variation pattern undefined") determined by the advance special figure 1 variation pattern determination process command, and the contents of the second variation pattern determined by the preliminary special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (“variation pattern number” or “variation pattern undefined”). Store in the request buffer.
Or, the second look-ahead designation command that specifies the type of the first variation pattern ("variation pattern number") determined by the pre-special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, and the pre-special figure 2 variation pattern determination process It was determined by A third prefetch designation command that designates the type of the second variation pattern (“variation pattern number”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
By the above, if it is determined that the advance determination start information is special figure 1 start information, and the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the advance determination start information is determined to be "indefinite value", specifically A second look-ahead designation command and a third look-ahead designation command designating that the variation pattern is indefinite are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 without determining the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-determination start information is special figure 1 start information, and the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination start information is determined to be a "fixed value", the specific The type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined, and the second look-ahead designation command and the third look-ahead designation command specifying the determined type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300. be.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-determined start information is the special figure 2 start information, the type of the specific variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined, and the type of the determined variation pattern (variation pattern number ) are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 .

Next, the special game management process of step S4-9 will be explained.
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing special game management processing.
In this embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") as "special symbol variation waiting state" , ``Special figure fluctuating state'', ``Special figure stop symbol display state'', ``Large winning opening pre-open state'', ``Large winning opening open control state'', and ``Large winning opening closing valid state'', "Large prize opening end wait state", "prior item opening state", "accessory opening control state", "accessory closing valid state", and "accessory opening end wait state" are defined. It is
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the 11 special game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-9, as shown in FIG. 14, the process first proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value obtained in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuation waiting state", the later-described special figure fluctuation waiting process is started, and the "special figure fluctuation state" If it is a value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "state before opening the big winning opening", the processing before opening the big winning opening is started, and if the value corresponds to the "control state for opening the big winning opening", it will be described later. When the big winning hole opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the "big winning hole closing valid state", the later-described big winning hole closing valid process is started and the "big winning hole opening end wait state" is entered. If it is a corresponding value, the later-described big winning opening end wait process is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "prior product opening state", the later-described role product opening pre-processing is started, If the value corresponds to the "accessory release control state", the access control processing to be described later is started. Validation processing is started, and when the value corresponds to the "accessory release end wait state", the accession release end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 15, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (No) , moves to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is greater than or equal to "1" (Yes), moves to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) , the process proceeds to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S10-4 ).
In step S11-3, a special figure pending number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure reservation number update process, the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure pending number update process, first, the starting information (special figure 1 starting Information and special figure 2 starting information) one starting information is selected as the determination starting information.
In this embodiment, for the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, priority is given to the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area, start determination (Special figure hit and drop determination, special figure stop design determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) are executed.
Therefore, if the special figure 2 starting information is stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area, the special figure 2 starting information stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area is acquired first (storage ) is selected as determination start information.
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 starting information is not stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area, the special figure 1 starting information stored in the special figure 1 starting information storage area is acquired first (storage ) is selected as determination start information.
Next, the value of the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) is updated. At this time, if the determined determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 reservation number counter is newly added to the special figure 1 reservation Set to number counter. On the other hand, if the determined determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 reservation number counter is newly added to the special figure 2 reservation number Set to counter.

In step S11-4, a special figure hit-loss determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special figure winning/losing determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special figure winning/losing determination).
In the special figure hit-loss determination process, first, based on the jackpot random number included in the determination start information and the special figure jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot" (jackpot determination). do.
Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is "jackpot". (Winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, then the jackpot random number included in the determination start information and , and a special symbol lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small hit" (small hit determination).
Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information matches the small hit value registered in the special small winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is " It is judged as "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information does not match the small hit value registered in the special small winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery will be "missed" ( unsuccessful).

In step S11-5, special figure stop design determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special figure stop design determination process, the type of the special figure stop design (stop design number) is determined (special figure stop design determination).
In the special figure stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure winning/losing determination, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
Specifically, based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol (stop symbol number) is determined.
On the other hand, in the special figure stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure winning/losing determination, the type of the small winning symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type of the small winning symbol (stop symbol number) is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the special figure stop design determination process, when it is determined as "lost" (lost) by the special figure win-lose determination, "lost design" is determined as the type of stop design (stop design number).
In the special figure stop symbol determination process, next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 .
In step S11-6, a pattern type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, a symbol type designation command designating the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the special symbol variation pattern is determined (special figure variation pattern determination).
In the special figure variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information.

And, when it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, first, the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information) is determined.
Specifically, if it is determined that the winning ("big hit" or "small hit") is determined by the special figure winning judgment, the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) and the random number at the time of winning Based on the classification lottery table, the classification of the variation pattern random number is determined (in this case, it is determined as "fixed value").
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated ("missing") by the special figure hit/loss determination, the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information) and the random number classification lottery table at the time of failure Based on , determine the classification of the fluctuation pattern random numbers.
When it is determined that the determination starting information is special figure 1 starting information, next, the contents of the first variation pattern are determined.
Specifically, if it is determined that the winning ("big hit" or "small hit") is determined by the special figure winning/losing judgment, the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) and the winning special Based on the first variation pattern lottery table in FIG. 1, the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is rejected ("missing") by the special figure hit and drop determination, and the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) is determined to be a "fixed value" Is, based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for fixed value when losing, the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number ) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection is rejected ("missing") by the special figure hit and drop determination, and the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) is determined to be "indefinite value" Is based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for undefined value at the time of defeat corresponding to the current special figure 1 reservation number, The type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is determined.
When it is determined that the determination starting information is special figure 1 starting information, next, the content of the second variation pattern is determined.
Specifically, if it is determined that the winning ("big hit" or "small hit") is determined by the special figure winning/losing judgment, the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) and the winning special Based on the second variation pattern lottery table in FIG. 1, the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is rejected ("missing") by the special figure hit and drop determination, and the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) is determined to be a "fixed value" Is, based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for fixed value at the time of defeat, the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number ) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection is rejected ("missing") by the special figure hit and drop determination, and the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) is determined to be "indefinite value" Is the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 1 start information), the current special figure 1 pending number, and the current execution status of time saving control (running or stopped) Corresponds to the combination of The type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for indeterminate value when losing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, first, the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
Specifically, if it is determined that the winning ("big hit" or "small hit") is determined by the special hit-loss judgment, the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) and the winning special Based on the first variation pattern lottery table in FIG. 2, the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated ("missing") by the special figure hit-loss determination, the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 2 start information), and the special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table at the time of defeat And, based on, the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
When it is determined that the determination starting information is the special figure 2 starting information, next, the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
Specifically, if it is determined that the winning ("big hit" or "small hit") is determined by the special hit-loss judgment, the variation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) and the winning special Based on the second variation pattern lottery table in FIG. 2, the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated ("missing") by the special figure hit-loss determination, the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 2 start information), and the special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table at the time of defeat And, based on, the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when determining the type of the first variation pattern based on the special figure 1 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery, the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or stopped), The number of reservations, etc. are taken into account. Also, when determining the type of the second variation pattern based on the special figure 1 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery, the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, etc. are considered.
That is, when the first special symbol lottery is lost, the execution status of time saving control, the table corresponding to the number of reservations, etc. The type of pattern is determined. Also, if you lose the first special symbol lottery, the second variation based on the table (special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for undefined value when losing) according to the execution status of time saving control, the number of reservations, etc. The type of pattern is determined.
On the other hand, when determining the type of the first variation pattern based on the special figure 2 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery is considered, but the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, etc. are not considered. Also, when determining the type of the second variation pattern based on the special figure 2 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery is considered, but the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, etc. are not considered.
That is, when the second special symbol lottery is won, regardless of the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, etc., based on one table (special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table when winning), the first variation The type of pattern is determined. Also, when the second special symbol lottery is won, regardless of the execution status of time saving control, the number of reservations, etc., the second variation based on one table (special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table when winning) The type of pattern is determined.
On the other hand, if you lose the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, etc., based on one table (special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table at the time of defeat), the first variation The type of pattern is determined. Also, if you lose the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, etc., based on one table (special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table at the time of defeat), the second variation The type of pattern is determined.

In step S11-8, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the variation pattern command setting process, the first variation pattern specification command specifying the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, the second variation pattern specification command specifying the type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-9, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of one fluctuation pattern determined in step S11-7 (hereinafter referred to as "variation time 1") is acquired. In addition, a variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Then, the total time of the acquired variable time 1 and variable time 2 is calculated. Then, the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.
In step S11-10, a special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set to the special figure display timer.
Next, when the determination starting information is the special figure 1 starting information, the special figure display pattern counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device 61 is set to a predetermined initial value. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display pattern counter among the predetermined number of segments which constitute the special figure 1 display device 61 is performed.
On the other hand, when the determination starting information is the special figure 2 starting information, a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 2 display device 62 . By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display design counter among the segments of the predetermined number which constitutes the special figure 2 display device 62 is performed.

In step S11-11, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the pending number designation command setting process, a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 do.
At this time, if the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, a reservation number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, If the determination starting information is the special figure 2 starting information, the reservation number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S11-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuating state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure fluctuation.
When the special figure fluctuation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 16, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 3, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S12-3, a special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special figure fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data update process, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is newly set to the special figure display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the type (stop design number) of the stop design stored in the stop design storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when ending the variable display of the first special symbol, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set to the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special symbol 1 display device 61. do. By this, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device 61, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is lighting controlled (stopped display).
On the other hand, when ending the variable display of the second special symbol, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set to the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 display device 62. . By this, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stopped display).
In step S12-5, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-6, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop designation command setting process, the stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure stop.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 17, the process first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S13-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the stop pattern is a "jackpot pattern"("jackpot 1 pattern" or "jackpot 2 patterns"), and if it is determined that the stop pattern is a "jackpot pattern" (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and when it is determined that the stopped symbol is not the "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
At step S13-3, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area, and the time saving control end designation command is sent to the subcommand output request buffer Store.
On the other hand, when it determines with "0" being set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230, the state in which "0" is set to the time saving control flag area|region is maintained.

In step S13-4, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first class special electric role control table corresponding to each type of jackpot gaming state. Each type 1 special electric role control table includes the opening time, the effective time for closing the large winning opening, the closing time for the large winning opening, the ending time, the number of round games, the number of open/close switching corresponding to each round game, and the Control data (solenoid control data, control time data) and the like corresponding to open/close switching are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the first class special electric role control table corresponding to the type of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) is read, and the read first class special electric role control table is stored in the special electric role control table of the RAM 230. Set to area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, the first type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-6, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the type of jackpot gaming state to be started (“jackpot 1” or “jackpot 2”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set.
In the special game phase update process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area of the RAM230. When it is determined that "1" is not set in the right-handed informing flag area ("0" is set), "1" is set in the right-handed informing start flag area of the RAM 230. - 特許庁On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S13-8, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "small winning symbol" (one of "small winning 1 symbol" to "small winning 6 symbols"). (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-9, and when it is determined that the stop symbol is not the "small hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-14.
In step S13-9, a time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the time saving control management process, the time saving control is managed.
Specifically, in the time saving control management process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
And when it determines with "1" being set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230, the time saving end determination process mentioned later is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("0" is set), the next process (step S13-10) is performed.
In the time saving end determination process, first, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the first time saving counter is newly set as the value of the first time saving counter.
Next, when ending the stop display of the second special symbol, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the second time saving counter is newly set as the value of the second time saving counter. On the other hand, when ending the stop display of the first special symbol, the second time saving counter is not updated.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the first time saving counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is "0", the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "0" (stopping the time saving control), and the time saving control end designation command, Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is not "0", it is further determined whether or not the value of the second time saving counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the second time saving counter is "0", the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "0" (stopping the time saving control), and the time saving control end designation command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is not "0" and the value of the second time saving counter is not "0", "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. (maintaining the state in which the time-saving control is being executed).
In step S13-10, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 54a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second type special electric role control table corresponding to each type of small winning gaming state. Each second-class special electric role control table includes opening time, accessory closing effective time, accessory closing time, ending time, number of small winning games, accessory solenoid control data corresponding to each small winning game ( Solenoid control data, control time data), V distribution solenoid control data corresponding to each small winning game (solenoid control data, control time data), etc. are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second type special electric role control table corresponding to the type of the stop symbol (small winning symbol) is read, and the read second kind special electric role control table is stored in the RAM 230 for special electric role control. Set to table area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

In step S13-11, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening time setting process, the second type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-12, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-13. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that designates the type of small winning game state to start (one of "small winning 1" to "small winning 6") is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "prior product release state" is set.
In the special game phase update process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area of the RAM230. When it is determined that "1" is not set in the right-handed informing flag area ("0" is set), "1" is set in the right-handed informing start flag area of the RAM 230. - 特許庁On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S13-14, a time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-15. In the time saving control management process, the time saving control is managed.
In the time saving control management process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
And when it determines with "1" being set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230, the time saving end determination process mentioned later is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("0" is set), the next process (step S13-15) is performed.
In the time saving end determination process, first, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the first time saving counter is newly set as the value of the first time saving counter.
Next, when ending the stop display of the second special symbol, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the second time saving counter is newly set as the value of the second time saving counter. On the other hand, when ending the stop display of the first special symbol, the second time saving counter is not updated.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the first time saving counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is "0", the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "0" (stopping the time saving control), and the time saving control end designation command, Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is not "0", it is further determined whether or not the value of the second time saving counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the second time saving counter is "0", the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "0" (stopping the time saving control), and the time saving control end designation command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is not "0" and the value of the second time saving counter is not "0", "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. (maintaining the state in which the time-saving control is being executed).
In the time saving control management process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period, it is further determined whether "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that "1" is not set in the flag area during the consecutive game period ("0" is set), "0" is set in the flag area during the consecutive game period. Keep the set state.
By the second determination, when it is determined that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0" (hereinafter , “third judgment”).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the second determination that "0" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("1" is set), "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period. Keep the set state.
By the third determination, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0", set "0" to the flag area during the consecutive chance period of the RAM 230, and issue the consecutive chance period end designation command. , is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "0"("1" or more), "1" is set to the flag area during the consecutive chance period maintain state.

In step S13-15, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.
In the special game phase update process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area, it is further determined whether "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. (hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the first determination that "1" is not set in the right-handed informing flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S10-4). do.
By the second determination, when it is determined that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0" (hereinafter , “third judgment”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that "0" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("1" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S10-4). do.
By the third determination, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0", "1" is set to the right hitting notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, by the third determination, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "0"("1" or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the big winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening processing for the big winning opening.
When the big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 18, the process first proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S14-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S14-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter is newly set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric service open/close switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open/close switching frequency setting process, the first type special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and opening/closing switching corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is performed. Read out the number of times. Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S14-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the special electric power opening/closing switching processing in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special electric service open/close switching process.
When the special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 19, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6 Or move to S16-4).
In step S15-2, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric role product 53a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the first type special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the value of the special service open/close switching number counter is set to Read the corresponding solenoid control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the control of the big winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be open or closed.

In step S15-3, a special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the first class special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the value of the special service open/close switching number counter is set to Read the corresponding control time. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric power opening/closing switching frequency counter update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is newly set in the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter.

Next, the big winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening control process.
When the big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S16-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S16-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 7 [ball]). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S10-4).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the big winning hole opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, a predetermined large winning opening closing effective time (interval time) is Set the special game timer.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening closing valid state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, a description will be given of the big winning opening closing valid process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening closing effective process.
When the big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S17-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No ), the process proceeds to step S17-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, with reference to the first class special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games defined in the first class special electric role control table is set as a specified value. Obtain and judge.
In step S17-3, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a special game timer is set to a predetermined big winning opening closing time by referring to the first type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. .
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, the first type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command designating the type of jackpot game state to end (“jackpot 1” or “jackpot 2”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "big winning opening opening end wait state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the waiting process for finishing the opening of the big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for ending the opening of the big winning opening.
When the big winning opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S18-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
At step S18-2, game state setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, if the type of the jackpot game state to end is "jackpot 1" or "small win 1 continuous jackpot" to "small win 6 continuous jackpot", a predetermined first time saving The number of times (in this embodiment, 100 [times]) is set in the first time saving counter. Moreover, the predetermined 2nd time saving frequency (this embodiment 4 [time]) is set to a 2nd time saving counter. Furthermore, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. FIG. Shortening of working hours control is started by this. Moreover, a time saving control start designation|designated command is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot game state to end is ``jackpot 2'', it is determined whether or not ``jackpot 2'' is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during execution of the time saving control. Then, when it is determined that the "jackpot 2" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time saving control, the predetermined first time saving number of times (in this embodiment, 100 [times]), Set to the first time-saving counter. Moreover, the predetermined 2nd time saving frequency (this embodiment 4 [time]) is set to a 2nd time saving counter. Furthermore, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. FIG. Shortening of working hours control is started by this. Moreover, a time saving control start designation|designated command is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that ``jackpot 2'' is won based on the special symbol lottery executed while the time saving control is stopped, the state in which '0' is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained. . Shortening of working hours control is not started by this.
In the game state setting process, next, it is determined whether or not "0" is set in the continuous-challenging period flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "0" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period, it is further determined whether "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
By the second determination, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period, and the consecutive chance period start designation command is Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the second determination that "1" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("0" is set), "0" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period. Keep the set state.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the first determination that "0" is not set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period ("1" is set), "0" is added to the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. ” is set (hereinafter referred to as “third determination”).
By the third determination, when it is determined that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0" (hereinafter , “fourth determination”).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the third determination that "0" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("1" is set), "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period. Keep the set state.
By the fourth determination, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0", set "0" to the flag area during the consecutive chance period, and the consecutive chance period end designation command, Sub Store in the command output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the fourth determination that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "0"("1" or more), "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period maintain state.
In the game state setting process, next, a value corresponding to the type of the big winning symbol is set in the previous big winning symbol flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.
In the special game phase update process, next, it is determined whether or not "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0" (hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the first determination that "0" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("1" is set), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4) .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0" by the second determination, "1" is set to the right hitting notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, by the second determination, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "0"("1" or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the role product release pre-processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the accessory release pre-processing.
When the role product release preprocessing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S42-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S42-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter is newly set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S42-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S42-4, a role product opening control start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the accessory opening control start process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 54a to be in the open state is set.
Specifically, in the accessory opening control start process, the second type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the special electric role continuous operation counter (small winning game number of times) corresponding to the value of the control time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment) is read. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer.
Also, the second type special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the accessory solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is read out. Then, the read accessory solenoid control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, control of the accessory solenoid 66 based on the set accessory solenoid control data is started, and the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined pattern.
Furthermore, with reference to the second-class special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, V allocation corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter (the number of small winning games) Read solenoid control data. Then, the read V distribution solenoid control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, control of the V apportionment solenoid 67 based on the set V apportionment solenoid control data is started, and the apportionment means is controlled to the V passage state or the V non-passage state in a predetermined pattern.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "accessory release control state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the accessory release control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the accessory release control process.
When the role product release control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S43-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-3.
In step S43-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (7 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric role winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-3. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S10-4).

In step S43-3, the access control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-4. In the accessory opening control end process, accessory solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the open state to the closed state.
Also, V-distribution solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the distribution means is displaced to the non-V-passing state.
In step S43-4, a role object closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-5. In the role product closing effective time setting process, a predetermined role product closing effective time (3. 0 [s]) is set to the special game timer.
In step S43-5, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-6. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S43-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "accessory closing valid state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the accessory closing validating process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the accessory closing valid process.
When the accessory closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, the process first proceeds to step S44-1.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S44-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S44-5.
In step S44-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S44-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S44-6.
Here, with reference to the second class special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of small winning games defined in the second class special electric role control table is set to the specified value. and make a judgment.

In step S44-3, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-4. In the ending time setting process, the second type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S44-4, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-5. In the ending specifying command setting process, an ending specifying command specifying the type of ending small winning game state (one of "small winning 1" to "small winning 6") is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S44-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "accessory release end wait state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S44-6, a role product closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-7. In the accessory closing time setting process, a second type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S44-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "prior product release state" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the accessory release end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the accessory release end wait process.
When the accessory release end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S45-1.
In step S45-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S45-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S45-2, various counter reset processes are executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-3. In various counter reset processes, an initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the winning ball counter.
In step S45-3, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that "1" is set in the V winning flag area (Yes), When the process proceeds to step S45-4 and it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the V winning flag area (No), the process proceeds to step S45-9.
In step S45-4, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area, and the time saving control end designation command is sent to the subcommand output request buffer Store.
On the other hand, when it determines with "0" being set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230, the state in which "0" is set to the time saving control flag area|region is maintained.

In step S45-5, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 53a is set.
In the special electric role control data setting process, first, the type of the big winning game state to be started after the end of the small winning game state is selected.
At this time, when the type of the small winning game state to end is "small win 1", "small win 1 continued big win" is selected as the type of the big winning game state to start, and the type of the small winning game state to end is selected. is "small win 2", select "small win 2 continuation big win" as the type of the starting jackpot gaming state, and if the type of the ending small winning gaming state is "small win 3" , If “small win 3 continuous jackpot” is selected as the type of the starting jackpot gaming state, and the type of the ending small winning gaming state is “small winning 4”, “small winning” is selected as the type of the starting jackpot gaming state. If the type of the small win game state to end is "small win 5", select "small win 5 continuous big win" as the type of the big win game state to start and end. When the type of the small winning game state is "small winning 6", "small winning 6 continuation big winning" is selected as the type of the big winning gaming state to start.
Next, the first class special electric role control table corresponding to the determined type of the jackpot gaming state is read, and the read first class special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S45-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-7. In the opening time setting process, the first type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S45-7, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that designates the type of jackpot gaming state to start (one of "1 small winning continuous jackpot" to "6 small winning continuous jackpot") is sent to the subcommand output request buffer. Store.
In step S45-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set.
Also, in the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S45-9, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.
In the special game phase update process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area, it is further determined whether "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. (hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the first determination that "1" is not set in the right-handed informing flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S10-4). do.
By the second determination, when it is determined that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0" (hereinafter , “third judgment”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that "0" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("1" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S10-4). do.
By the third determination, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0", "1" is set to the right hitting notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, by the third determination, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "0"("1" or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag area of the RAM 230 during the consecutive chance period (hereinafter referred to as "fourth determination").
Then, when it is determined by the fourth determination that "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period, it is further determined whether "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "fifth determination").
On the other hand, if it is determined by the fourth determination that "1" is not set in the flag area during the consecutive game period ("0" is set), "0" is set in the flag area during the consecutive game period. Keep the set state.
By the fifth determination, when it is determined that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0" (hereinafter , “sixth judgment”).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the fifth determination that "0" is not set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("1" is set), "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period. Keep the set state.
By the sixth determination, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0", set "0" to the flag area during the consecutive chance period of the RAM 230, and issue the consecutive chance period end designation command , is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "0"("1" or more) by the sixth determination, "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive chance period maintain state.
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit pattern flag area, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate values. Then, a game state designation command designating the calculated game state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

Next, the normal game management process of step S4-10 will be explained.
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing.
Here, in the present embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") executed based on the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase"), "normal pattern fluctuation waiting State", "Normal figure fluctuating state", "Normal figure stop pattern display state", "Normal figure electric accessory opening state", "Normal figure electric accessory open control state", "Normal figure electric accessory closed valid State” and “normal figure electric accessory open end wait state” are defined.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-10, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, normal game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, normal game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read.
In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value obtained in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process described later is started, and the "normal pattern fluctuation state" If it is a value corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern stop symbol display state", the normal pattern stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessary product opening pre-state", the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessary product opening control state" , the normal electric role product opening control process to be described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric role product closing valid state", the normal electric role product closing valid process to be described later is started, and the "normal electric role If the value corresponds to "object release end wait state", the normal electric accessary product release end wait process described later is started.

Next, the general pattern fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change waiting processing.
When normal figure fluctuation waiting processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) , Move to step S20-2, if it is determined that the value of the normal figure pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), end the series of processes and move to the next process (step S4-11) do.
In step S20-2, normal figure reservation number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general pattern reservation number update process, the general pattern reservation number is updated.
Specifically, in the general pattern reservation number update process, one of the general pattern starting information stored in the general pattern starting information storage area of the RAM 230 is selected as the determination starting information.
In the present embodiment, of the general pattern start information stored in the general pattern start information storage area, the first general pattern start information acquired (stored) is selected as the determination start information.

In step S20-3, normal figure hit-lose determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal pattern lottery determination process, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined (normal pattern hit/loss determination).
The ROM 220 stores a normal symbol lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered.
Then, in the general pattern hit-lose determination process, the general pattern hit-lose determination is executed based on the hit random number included in the determination start information and the general pattern hit-lose lottery table.
Specifically, when the value of the hit random number included in the determination start information matches the hit value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "hit" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number included in the determination start information does not match the hit value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "loss" (loss).

In step S20-4, normal pattern stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal pattern stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal pattern stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the general pattern stop design determination process, if it is determined to be "hit" (winning) by the general pattern winning judgment, the type of stop design (stop design number) is "normal pattern per design". judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the normal figure winning/losing determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 .
In step S20-5, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the general pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped, the first type (in this embodiment, 2.0 The type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) as the type of normal figure fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) judge.

In step S20-6, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of general pattern fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, normal figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the normal pattern fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the normal pattern display device 60 is set.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal pattern display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general pattern display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal pattern display device 60, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "ordinary figure fluctuating state" is set.

Next, the process during normal figure fluctuation executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing processing during normal pattern fluctuation.
When the normal figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-11) is performed.
In step S21-3, normal figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal pattern display device 60 is updated.
Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation display data update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the general pattern display symbol counter is newly set to the general pattern display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, a normal map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device 60 is set.
Specifically, in the general pattern stop display data setting process, the type of stop pattern (stop pattern number) stored in the stop pattern storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the acquired stop symbol (stop symbol number) is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal pattern display device 60, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter is controlled to light up (stopped display).
In step S21-5, normal figure stop time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, the predetermined stop time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set.

Next, the process during normal figure stop executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S22-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop pattern is the "normal pattern winning pattern", and if it is determined that the stop pattern is not the "normal pattern winning pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. However, when it is determined that the stopped symbol is a "normal winning symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.
In step S22-4, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric work control table corresponding to the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or during suspension). In each ordinary electric duty control table, the time before opening the ordinary electric duty, the valid time for closing the ordinary electric duty, the waiting time for the end of opening, the number of open/close switching times, and the control data corresponding to each open/close switching (solenoid control data, control time, etc.) data), etc.
In the ordinary electric service control data setting process, the ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or being stopped) is read, and the read ordinary electric service control table is stored in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. set.
Next, referring to the ordinary electric work control table set in the ordinary electric work control table area of the RAM 230, the opening/closing switching times are read out. Then, the number of open/close switching times read out is set in the normal electric open/close switching number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the winning number counter for the ordinary electric role.

At step S22-5, a normal electric service pre-opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the ordinary electric role opening time setting process, the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ordinary electric role opening time period is set in the ordinary game timer.
In step S22-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening pre-state" is set.

Next, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing.
When the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S23-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S23-2, normal electric open/close switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The ordinary electric open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening control state" is set.

Next, the ordinary electric open/close switching processing in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing normal electric open/close switching processing.
When the ordinary electric open/close switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No), , the process proceeds to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3 Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric accessory 52a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric power control data setting process, the normal electric power control table set in the normal electric power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric power open/close switching frequency counter is selected. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the control of the starting port solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, normal electric service control time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the ordinary electric power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the normal electric service control table set in the normal service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the normal service open/close switching frequency counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, normal electric switch opening/closing number counter update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S23-3 or S25-4) is performed. In the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is newly set in the normal electric opening/closing switching number counter.

Next, the normal electric accessary product opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 33, the process first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S25-2 If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No) , the process proceeds to step S25-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric open/close switching processing (see FIG. 32) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the normal electric winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-11).

In step S25-5, normal electric power opening control end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric power opening control end process, solenoid control data designating de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, normal electric service closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric role closing valid time setting process, the ordinary electric role closing valid time is set in the ordinary game timer by referring to the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
In step S25-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product closing valid state" is set.

Next, the normal electric accessary product closing valid process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product closing valid processing.
When the normal electric accessary product closing valid process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S26-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
At step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product open end wait state" is set.

Next, the normal electric accessary product open end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening end wait processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S27-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S27-2, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-11) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

Next, the firing position designation management process executed in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing firing position designation management processing.
When the firing position designation management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S46-1.
In step S46-1, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed notification start flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that "1" is set in the right-handed notification start flag area (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S46-2, and if it is determined that "1" is not set in the right-handed notification start flag area ("0" is set) (No), step S46- Go to 4.
In step S46-2, right hitting notification start processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-3. In the right-handed notification start process, the launch position display device of the state display device 63 starts to display (hereinafter referred to as "right-handed notification display") specifying (notifying) that the game ball is launched to the right path 30b.
In addition, "1" is set in the right-handed informing flag area of the RAM 230. FIG. Furthermore, "0" is set in the right hitting notification start flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S46-3, right-handed notification start designation command setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-4. In the right hitting notification start designation command setting process, the right hitting notification start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S46-4, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that "1" is set in the right-handed notification end flag area (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S46-5, and if it is determined that "1" is not set in the right-handed informing end flag area ("0" is set) (No), a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S46-5, a right hitting notification end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-6. In the right-handed notification end processing, the shooting position display device of the state display device 63 ends the right-handed notification display, and displays a designation (notification) of launching the game ball to the left path 30a (hereinafter referred to as "left-handed notification display"). ) is started.
In addition, "0" is set in the right-handed informing flag area of the RAM 230. FIG. Furthermore, "0" is set in the right hitting notification end flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S46-6, a right-handed notification end designation command setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the right hitting notification end designation command setting process, the right hitting notification end designation command is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Processing executed by production control circuit 300)
Next, the CPU of the production|presentation control circuit 300 demonstrates the production|presentation control processing which is performed based on the program (software) memorize|stored in ROM.
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing effect control processing.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 executes CPU initialization processing (not shown) and then repeatedly executes main loop processing (not shown). Here, by the CPU initialization processing, "0" is set to each flag area such as the flag area during the consecutive chance period of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the flag area during the time saving control.
In addition, the frequency generation circuit (not shown) of the effect control circuit 300 generates a timer interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt period (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment). Then, the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the effect control process shown in FIG. 37 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process in response to the generation of the timer interrupt request signal.
When the effect control process is started, the process moves to step S32-1.
In step S32-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM.

In step S32-2, an effect flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3. In the effect flag setting process, various effect flags are set.
In the effect flag setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving control start designation command is received. And when it determines with having received the time saving control start specification command, "1" is set to the flag area during time saving control of RAM of the production|presentation control circuit 300. FIG.
In the effect flag setting process, next, it is determined whether or not the time saving control end designation command is received. And when it determines with having received the time saving control completion|finish specification command, "0" is set to the flag area during time saving control of RAM of the production|presentation control circuit 300. FIG.
In the effect flag setting process, next, it is determined whether or not a consecutive chance period start designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the command for specifying the start of the consecutive chance period has been received, "1" is set in the during consecutive chance period flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. - 特許庁
In the effect flag setting process, next, it is determined whether or not a consecutive chance period end designation command is received. Then, when it is determined that the command for specifying the end of the consecutive chance period has been received, "0" is set in the during consecutive chance period flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. - 特許庁

In step S32-3, a pending effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. In the pending performance management process, a pending performance is set.
Specifically, in the pending effect management process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 pending number has increased by "1" has been received.
Then, when it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reservation number has increased by "1", "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter. Further, in the reserved design display area b2, a process for starting the display of the reserved design h corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 start information is executed.
In the pending effect management process, next, it is determined whether or not a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 pending number has increased by "1" has been received.
And, when it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 reservation number has increased by "1", "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter. Further, in the reserved design display area b2, a process for starting the display of the reserved design h corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 start information is executed.
In the pending effect management process, next, it is determined whether or not a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 pending number has decreased by "1" has been received.
And, when it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reservation number has decreased by "1" is received, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter. In addition, in the reserved design display area b2, the display of the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 1 start information for which the notification display of the special design is started is finished, and in the reserved design display area b1, the reservation corresponding to the start information A process for starting the display of the symbol h is executed.
In the pending effect management process, next, it is determined whether or not a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 pending number has decreased by "1" has been received.
And, if it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 reservation number has decreased by "1", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter. In addition, in the reserved design display area b2, the display of the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 starting information for which the notification display of the special design is started is finished, and in the reserved design display area b1, the reservation corresponding to the starting information A process for starting the display of the symbol h is executed.

In step S32-4, pre-determination information saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. In the pre-determination information storage process, information specified by the prefetch specification command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM as reserved information.
Specifically, in the pre-determination information saving process, first, it is determined whether or not prefetching designation commands (first prefetching designation command, second prefetching designation command, and third prefetching designation command) have been received.
When it is determined that all the prefetching designation commands (the first prefetching designation command, the second prefetching designation command, and the third prefetching designation command) have been received, the pending information storage process is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one prefetch designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

A suspension information storage area capable of storing suspension information is set in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . Also, as the reservation information storage area, the first reservation information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 start information storage area of RAM 230), the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 start information storage area of RAM 230) ) is set.
In the first pending information storage area, it is possible to store pending information up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment). In the first pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is stored. That is, each hold information stored in the first hold information storage area corresponds to each special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area.
In the second pending information storage area, it is possible to store pending information up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment). In the second pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is stored. That is, each reservation information stored in the second reservation information storage area corresponds to each special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area.
Each reserved information includes pattern information indicating the type of the stopped pattern, the first variation information indicating the contents of the first variation pattern ("variation pattern number" or "variation pattern undefined"), and the contents of the second variation pattern (" and the second variation information indicating "variation pattern number" or "variation pattern unknown").

In the pending information storage process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the first look-ahead designation command ("lost design", "jackpot p design ” or “small hit q pattern”), the contents of the first variation pattern specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern undefined” or “variation pattern m”), and the second specified by the third look-ahead specification command The content of the variation pattern ("variation pattern undefined" or "variation pattern n") is analyzed, and the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol and the first corresponding to the contents of the analyzed first variation pattern Hold information including the variation information and the second variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed second variation pattern is generated. Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the first pending information storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the first look-ahead designation command ("lost design", "jackpot p design ” or “small hit q pattern”), the contents of the first variation pattern specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern m”), and the contents of the second variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“ Variation pattern n”), and symbol information corresponding to the type of analyzed stop symbol, first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed first variation pattern, and the content of the analyzed second variation pattern and the second variation information corresponding to . Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the second pending information storage area.

In step S32-5, a variable effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. Fluctuation effect management processing will be described later.
In step S32-6, stop effect management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop effect management process will be described later.
In step S32-7, a small winning effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. Small hit production|presentation management processing is mentioned later.
In step S32-8, a jackpot performance management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-9. The jackpot effect management processing will be described later.
In step S32-9, a V winning effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-10. The V winning effect management process will be described later.
In step S32-10, an additional effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-11. The additional effect management processing will be described later.
In step S32-11, firing position display management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-12. The firing position display management process will be described later.
In step S32-12, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S32-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, the variable effect management process executed in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the variable effect management process.
When the variable effect management process is executed in step S32-5, as shown in FIG. 38, the process first proceeds to step S33-1.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2, and the predetermined control command is received. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command means a symbol type designation command, a first variation pattern designation command and a second variation pattern designation command.
Whether or not the predetermined control command has been received depends on whether the symbol type designation command, the first variation pattern designation command and the second variation pattern designation command are stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. decision based on

In step S33-2, it is determined whether or not it is during the consecutive playing period, and if it is determined that it is not during the consecutive playing period (No), the process proceeds to step S33-3, and it is determined that it is during the consecutive playing period. If so (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-6.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a "continuous chance period" is defined as a game period during which the game state is advantageous to the player.
In the present embodiment, the continuous chan period is during execution of the time saving control, that the jackpot gaming state is occurring, and the notification display based on the special figure 2 start information (variation display or stop display) during execution It is a period that satisfies at least one condition.
Specifically, during the consecutive chance period, when the "jackpot 1" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed while the time saving control is stopped, according to the end of the jackpot gaming state (start of the time saving control) be started. The consecutive chance period continues as long as the time saving control is being executed or the jackpot gaming state is occurring. And, during the continuous chan period, when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter or second time saving counter) becoming "0", special figure 2 start information storage area If the special figure 2 start information is not stored in (the special figure 2 reservation number is "0"), it is terminated according to the end of the time saving control, while the time saving counter (first time saving counter or second When the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the 2 hour-short counter) becoming "0", "1" or more special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. (Special figure 2 pending number is "1" or more), of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 2 start where the start determination is executed at the end It is ended according to the end of the small winning game state generated according to the end of the notification display (variation display and stop display) based on the information.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive playing period during the consecutive playing period.
Therefore, in step S33-2, when "0" is set in the flag area during the consecutive playing period, it is determined that the consecutive playing period is not in progress, and "1" is set in the flag area during the consecutive playing period. If there is, it is determined that it is during the consecutive chance period.

In step S33-3, a notification effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-4. In the notification effect lottery process, the mode of the variable effect (variation effect number) and the mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) are determined.
In the notification effect lottery process, first, the stop effect (mode of first to fourth effect symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop effect number)) is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a stop effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the stop effect lottery random number and the mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) is registered. Also, as a stop effect lottery table, a stop effect lottery table corresponding to each type of stop symbol (each stop symbol number) is stored.
When determining the mode of the stop effect, first, a stop effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the stop effect lottery table corresponding to the type of stop design (stop design number) specified by the design type designation command is read. Then, based on the obtained stop effect lottery random number and the stop effect lottery table, the mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) is determined.
Also, the mode of the determined stop effect (stop effect number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .

In the notification effect lottery process, next, the aspect of the variable effect (variable effect number) is determined.
The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a first variable performance lottery table during the normal period in which the correspondence between the value of the variable performance lottery random number and the mode (variation performance number) of the first variable performance is registered. . In addition, as the first variation effect lottery table during the normal period, the first variation effect lottery table during the normal period corresponding to each type of the first variation pattern (each variation pattern number) is stored.
In addition, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores the second variable effect lottery table during the normal period in which the correspondence between the value of the variable effect lottery random number and the mode of the second variable effect (variable effect number) is registered. ing. In addition, as the second variation effect lottery table during the normal period, the second variation effect lottery table during the normal period corresponding to each type of the second variation pattern (each variation pattern number) is stored.
In the present embodiment, during the normal period, each drum 24a to 24a to 24b determines whether or not the first to third performance symbols are stopped and displayed as a "jackpot symbol" on the drum type display device 24 as a variable effect. A stimulating effect (hereinafter referred to as “variation effect during normal period”) is executed by the action of 24c.
"Normal period" refers to a period excluding the period of consecutive chances.
In each normal period first variable effect lottery table and each normal period second variable effect lottery table, a mode (variation pattern number) relating to the normal period variable effect is registered.

When determining the aspect of the variable performance, first, a variable performance lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, during the normal period corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern specified by the first variation pattern specification command, the first variation effect lottery table is read. Then, based on the acquired variable performance lottery random number and the first variable performance lottery table during the normal period, the aspect of the first variable performance (variation performance number) is determined.
Next, the second variation effect lottery table is read during the normal period corresponding to the second variation pattern type (variation pattern number) specified by the second variation pattern specification command. Then, based on the acquired variable performance lottery random number and the second variable performance lottery table during the normal period, the aspect of the second variable performance (variation performance number) is determined.

In step S33-4, a notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-5. In the notice effect lottery process, it is decided whether or not to execute the notice effect, and when it is decided to execute the notice effect, the mode of the notice effect is decided.
"Forecast effect" is an effect that is executed during the variable display of the effect patterns (first to fourth effect patterns), and the result of the special symbol lottery related to the variable display ("lost" or "jackpot ”) is a production that suggests (notice).
The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a notice performance lottery table in which hit values of the notice performance lottery are registered. Further, as a notice effect lottery table, a notice effect lottery table corresponding to each type of stop symbol (each stop symbol number) is stored.
In addition, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores an announcement effect mode lottery table in which correspondence between the value of the announcement effect lottery random number and the mode of the announcement effect (the announcement effect number) is registered.
In the notice effect lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect.
For this, first, a notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the advance notice effect lottery table corresponding to the type of stop design (stop design number) specified by the design type designation command is read. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the announcement effect based on the value of the acquired announcement effect lottery random number and the announcement effect lottery table.
When it is decided to execute the notice performance, next, the manner of the notice performance (the notice performance number) is determined based on the value of the obtained notice performance lottery random number and the notice performance mode lottery table. .

In step S33-5, a normal time variation effect start process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the normal time fluctuation production start processing, the fluctuation production is started.
The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores performance control tables corresponding to various performances. And, as the effect control table, the effect control table corresponding to each variable effect number, the effect control table corresponding to each notice effect number, the effect control table corresponding to each stop effect number, and the effect control table corresponding to each small winning effect number a performance control table corresponding to each jackpot performance number, a performance control table corresponding to the V winning performance, a performance control table corresponding to each ending performance number, and a performance corresponding to each initial notification performance number. A control table and a performance control table corresponding to each additional performance number are stored.
In each effect control table, various effects (display of effect images on the image display device 23, driving of the drums 24a to 24c on the drum type display device 24, output of effect sounds by the sound generator 22, lighting of the lamps 20 and 21, etc.) is registered.

In the normal time fluctuation production start process, the production control table corresponding to the first fluctuation production mode (variation production number) determined in step S33-3, and the second fluctuation production mode determined in step S33-3 ( Read out the effect control table corresponding to the variable effect number).
Further, when it is decided to execute the notice effect in step S33-4, the effect control table corresponding to the determined notice effect mode (prediction effect number) is read.
Then, the effect control table related to the first variable effect and the effect control table related to the second variable effect are combined to generate the effect control table related to the variable effect. At this time, when it is decided to execute the notice performance, the performance control table related to the first variable performance, the performance control table related to the second variable performance, and the performance control table related to the notice performance are synthesized. Then, an effect control table related to the variable effect is generated.
Furthermore, the generated effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. - 特許庁By this, the variable production based on the set production control table is started.

In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7, and the continuous battle effect is performed. is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-8.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a battle effect is executed as a notification effect (fluctuation effect and stop effect) and a small win effect during the continuous playing period.
In the "battle effect", the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 displays an effect image in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and the content of the effect image suggests (notifies) the result of the special symbol lottery. .
In this embodiment, a single battle effect and a continuous battle effect are set as the types of battle effects.
The "single-shot battle effect" is a type of battle effect in which the content of the effect (story) is completed with each notification effect (fluctuation effect, stop effect, and small winning effect).
In the single-shot battle production, the result of the special symbol lottery (start determination) is suggested (notified) by the contents of the single-shot battle production (contents of the production image).
Specifically, in the one-shot battle effect, when a special symbol lottery wins a specific role, an effect image in which the ally character wins is displayed. On the other hand, in the one-shot battle effect, if the specific role is not won by the special symbol lottery, an effect image in which the ally character is defeated is displayed.
"Specific combination" refers to a winning type that can cause a jackpot game state in which the time saving control is started. In this embodiment, the special combination refers to "V win possible small win", "big win 1" or "big win 2".
Therefore, ``when winning a specific combination'' means when winning ``V win possible small win'', ``big win 1'' or ``jackpot 2''.
On the other hand, ``when not winning a specific role'' means when winning a ``small win that cannot win a V prize'' or when ``losing'' (losing).
“V win possible small win” is the type of small win that allows (easy) passage of the V area by the game ball during the occurrence of the small win game state, especially the big win game state in which the time reduction control is started. Refers to the type of small hit that can be done. In this embodiment, "V win possible small win" refers to "small win 1" to "small win 3".
"V winning impossible small hit" is a type of small hit that makes it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state, especially the big winning game state in which the time saving control is started. refers to the type of small hit that cannot occur. In this embodiment, "V winning impossible small win" refers to "small win 4" to "small win 6".

"Continuous battle effect" is a type of battle effect in which the content of the effect (story) can be continued over a predetermined number of notification effects (fluctuation effect, stop effect, and small win effect). The continuous battle effect includes notification effects of a predetermined number of times (three [times] in the present embodiment) at maximum. Then, in the continuous battle effect, an individual battle effect is executed as a notification effect for each time.
In the continuous battle effect, the result of the special symbol lottery (start determination) is suggested (notified) depending on the contents of each individual battle effect (notification effect of each time).
Specifically, in each individual battle effect, if a special role is won by a special symbol lottery, an effect image is displayed that gives an advantage to the ally character. On the other hand, in the individual battle effect of each time, if the specific role is not won by the special symbol lottery, a effect image is displayed that puts the ally character at a disadvantage.
During execution of the continuous battle effect, "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. - 特許庁
Then, in step S33-6, when "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and "0" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. When it is set, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed.

In step S33-7, an individual battle effect start process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the individual battle production start process, an individual battle production (variation production) is started.
In the individual battle effect start processing, first, the value of the individual battle counter is checked. Also, in step S36-13, the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is referred to, and the variable effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter is read. Furthermore, the effect control table corresponding to the read variable effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . Thereby, an individual battle effect (fluctuation effect) based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S33-8, a single-shot battle effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-9. In the single-shot battle effect lottery process, the aspect (fluctuation effect number) of the single-shot battle effect is determined.
In the single-shot battle production lottery process, first, the type of enemy character to be the opponent in the single-shot battle production is determined.
In this embodiment, six types of "enemy character A" to "enemy character F" are set as the types of enemy characters.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores an enemy character lottery table in which correspondences between enemy character lottery random numbers and types of enemy characters ("enemy character A" to "enemy character F") are registered. there is
Also, as the enemy character lottery table, there are stored an enemy character lottery table at the time of winning corresponding to the case of winning the specific role and an enemy character lottery table at the time of losing corresponding to the case of not winning the specific role.
In addition, as an enemy character lottery table at the time of winning, each combination of the types of friendly characters ("friendly character A" to "friendly character C") described later and the number of round games that can be executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. A winning enemy character lottery table corresponding to is stored.
In addition, as an enemy character lottery table at the time of defeat, an enemy character lottery table at the time of defeat corresponding to each type of ally characters ("ally character A" to "ally character C") is stored.
Then, in the one-shot battle production, the combination of the type of friendly character selected in advance and the type of enemy character determined as an opponent (hereinafter referred to as "match combination") is the expected value of winning a specific role. and the number of round games that can be executed when a specific combination is won are suggested.
"Expected value" means the degree of possibility of winning a specific combination when the match combination is determined (displayed).

When determining the type of enemy character, first, an enemy character lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is won based on the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type specifying command.
Then, when it is determined that the specific role has been won, the type of the friend character specified by the friend character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the specific role specified by the symbol type specification command and the number of round games corresponding to , and the winning enemy character lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired enemy character lottery random number and the winning enemy character lottery table, the type of enemy character is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the particular role has not been won, the kind of ally character designated by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is confirmed, and the result of confirmation is dealt with. Read out the enemy character lottery table when losing. Then, based on the acquired enemy character lottery random number and the enemy character lottery table for failure, the type of enemy character is determined.

In the single-shot battle production lottery process, next, the type of enemy character appearance pattern in the single-shot battle production is determined.
In this embodiment, as appearance patterns corresponding to each type of enemy character ("Enemy Character A" to "Enemy Character F"), a plurality of types of appearance patterns with different expected values for winning a specific role are set. there is
The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores an appearance pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the appearance pattern lottery random number and the type of the appearance pattern is registered.
As the appearance pattern lottery table, a winning appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to the case of winning the specific role and an appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to the case of not winning the specific role are stored.
In addition, as a winning appearance pattern lottery table, a winning appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to each type of enemy character is stored.
In addition, as an appearance pattern lottery table at the time of failure, an appearance pattern lottery table at the time of failure corresponding to each type of enemy character is stored.

When determining the type of appearance pattern of the enemy character, first, an appearance pattern lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is won based on the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type specifying command.
Then, when it is determined that the player has won the specific role, the type of the determined enemy character is confirmed, and the winning appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the obtained appearance pattern lottery random number and the winning appearance pattern lottery table, the type of appearance pattern is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific role has not been won, the type of the determined enemy character is confirmed, and the appearance pattern lottery table for failure corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired appearance pattern lottery random number and the appearance pattern lottery table at the time of failure, the type of appearance pattern is determined.

In the single-shot battle production lottery process, next, the type of special move of the ally character in the single-shot battle production is determined.
In this embodiment, as the special moves corresponding to each type of friendly character (each of "ally character A" to "ally character C"), a plurality of types of special moves with different expected values for winning a specific role are set. there is
The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a deathblow lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the deathblow lottery random number and the type of deathblow is registered.
Also, as a special move lottery table, a winning special move lottery table corresponding to the case of winning the specific role and a deathblow technique lottery table corresponding to the case of not winning the specific role are stored.
Also, as a winning special move lottery table, a winning special move lottery table corresponding to each match combination is stored.
Also, as a deathblow technique lottery table for failure, a deathblow lottery table for failure is stored corresponding to each match combination.

When determining the type of special move of the ally character, first, a special move lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is won based on the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type specifying command.
Then, when it is determined that the specific role has been won, the type of the ally character designated by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the determined type of the enemy character, is confirmed, and the winning deathblow lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the type of the special move is determined based on the obtained special move lottery random number and the winning special move lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific role has not been won, the kind of allied character designated by the allied character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the type of the determined enemy character , and read out the deathblow lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result. Then, the type of the deathblow is determined based on the obtained deathblow lottery random number and the failure deathblow lottery table.

In the single-shot battle effect lottery process, next, the aspect of the variable effect (variable effect number) is determined.
A ROM of a performance control circuit 300 stores a single-shot battle first variable performance lottery table in which correspondence between a value of a variable performance lottery random number and a mode (variation performance number) of a first variable performance is registered.
In addition, as a single-shot battle first variation effect lottery table, each combination of the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number), the type of the ally character, the type of the enemy character, and the type of appearance pattern is provided. A single-shot battle first variation effect lottery table is stored.
In each single-shot battle first variation effect lottery table, a single-shot game corresponding to a combination of a friendly character type, an enemy character type, and an appearance pattern type corresponding to the single-shot battle first variation effect lottery table is provided. A variable production number related to the battle production is registered.
In addition, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a single-shot battle second variable effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the variable effect lottery random number and the second variable effect mode (variable effect number) is registered. there is
In addition, as a single-shot battle second variation effect lottery table, it corresponds to each combination of the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number), the type of ally character, the type of enemy character, and the type of special move. A single-shot battle second variation effect lottery table is stored.
Then, in each single-shot battle second variation effect lottery table, a single-shot corresponding to a combination of a friendly character type, an enemy character type, and a special move type corresponding to the single-shot battle second variation effect lottery table A variable production number related to the battle production is registered.

When determining the aspect of the variable performance, first, a variable performance lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern specified by the first variation pattern specification command, and the type of friend character specified by the friend character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the production control circuit 300 , the determined types of enemy characters and the determined types of appearance patterns are confirmed, and a single-shot battle first variation performance lottery table corresponding to the confirmation results is read. Then, based on the acquired variable performance lottery random number and the single-shot battle first variable performance lottery table, the aspect (variation performance number) of the first variable performance is determined.
Next, the type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern specified by the second variation pattern specification command, and the kind of friend character specified by the friend character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the production control circuit 300 Then, the determined types of enemy characters and the determined types of special moves are confirmed, and the single-shot battle second variation effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation results is read. Then, based on the obtained variable performance lottery random number and the single-shot battle second variable performance lottery table, the aspect (variation performance number) of the second variable performance is determined.

In the single-shot battle effect lottery process, next, the mode (stop effect number) of the stop effect related to the single-shot battle effect is determined.
In the ROM of the production control circuit 300, correspondence between the aspect of the second variable production related to the single-shot battle production (variable production number) and the mode of the stop production related to the single-shot battle production (stop production number) is registered. A battle stop effect selection table is stored.
When determining the mode of the stop effect related to the single-shot battle effect, the single-shot battle stop effect selection table is read. Then, based on the second variable effect mode (variable effect number) related to the single-shot battle effect and the single-shot battle stop effect mode selection table, the mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) related to the single-shot battle effect is determined. to decide.
Also, the mode of the determined stop effect (stop effect number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .

In step S33-9, it is determined whether or not the "V non-winable small win" is won, and if it is determined that the "V non-winable small win" is won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-10. If it is determined that the player has not won the "V win-impossible small win" (No), the process proceeds to step S33-12.
Here, whether or not the "V win impossible small win" is won is determined based on the type of stop design (stop design number) designated by the design type designating command.

In step S33-10, a small winning effect lottery process is executed at the time of defeat, and the process proceeds to step S33-11. In the small winning performance lottery process at the time of losing, the type of small winning performance (small winning performance at the time of losing) related to the single-shot battle performance is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 'V winning small win impossible' is won, a small win performance at the time of failure is executed as a small winning performance executed during the occurrence of the small winning game state.
The small winning performance at the time of losing is a performance suggesting the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the starting information stored in the starting information storage area.
Specifically, whether or not the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won is included in the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. It is a production that suggests.
In this embodiment, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area includes special figure 2 start information indicating that a specific role has been won as a type of small hit production at the time of defeat. A plurality of small hit production types are set at the time of defeat with different expected values for being.
In addition, the ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a small winning performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the small winning performance lottery random number and the mode (small winning performance number) of the small winning performance at the time of losing is registered. It is A small winning performance number relating to the small winning performance at the time of losing is registered in each small winning performance lottery table.
In addition, when the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination is won is included in the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area as a small winning effect lottery table at the time of defeat The special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won is not included in the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area and the corresponding small winning performance lottery table at the time of the first election. A small winning effect lottery table corresponding to the case is stored.

In the small winning performance lottery process at the time of losing, first, a small winning performance lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, whether or not the pending information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second pending information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) contains the hold information specifying that the specific combination has been won determine whether
And, if the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) contains the hold information specifying that the specific combination has been won When the determination is made, the small winning performance lottery table at the time of the first defeat is read. Then, based on the obtained small winning performance lottery random number and the first small winning performance lottery table, the mode of the small winning performance at the time of losing (small winning performance number) is determined.
On the other hand, if the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) does not contain the hold information specifying that the specific combination has been won When the determination is made, a small winning performance lottery table at the time of second losing is read. Then, based on the obtained small winning performance lottery random number and the second small winning performance lottery table, the mode of the small winning performance at the time of losing (small winning performance number) is determined.

In step S33-11, a small winning effect setting process is executed at the time of defeat, and the process proceeds to step S33-12. In the small winning performance setting process at the time of losing, the mode of the small winning performance at the time of losing determined in step S33-10 (small winning performance number) is stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control circuit 300.
In step S33-12, a one-shot battle production start process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the single-shot battle production start processing, a single-shot battle production (fluctuation production) is started.
In the single-shot battle production start process, the production control table corresponding to the first variable production mode (variation production number) related to the single-shot battle production determined in step S33-8, and the single-shot battle production determined in step S33-8. Read out the effect control table corresponding to the aspect of the second variable effect (variable effect number). Also, the effect control table related to the first variable effect and the effect control table related to the second variable effect are combined to generate the effect control table related to the variable effect.
Then, the generated effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. - 特許庁As a result, a single battle effect (fluctuation effect) based on the set effect control table is started.

Next, the stop effect management process executed in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing stop effect management processing.
When the stop effect management process is executed in step S32-6, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S34-1.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, where the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
Here, whether or not the stop designation command is received is determined based on whether or not the stop designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .

In step S34-2, stop effect start processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S32-7) is performed. In the stop effect start process, the stop effect is started.
Specifically, in the stop effect start process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed. Here, when "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and when "0" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. , it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed.
Then, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, the value of the individual battle counter is checked. Further, in step S36-13, the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is referred to, and the stop effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter is read. Furthermore, the effect control table corresponding to the read stop effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . By this, the stop production based on the set production control table is started.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed, the effect control table corresponding to the stop design mode (stop effect number) set in step S33-3 or step S33-8 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . By this, the stop production based on the set production control table is started.

Next, the small winning effect management process executed in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing a small winning effect management process. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a pre-determination result pattern.
When the small winning effect management process is executed in step S32-7, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2, where the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
Here, whether or not the opening designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the opening designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .
In step S35-2, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command designates "small hit"("small hit 1" to "small hit 6"), and if the opening designation command designates "small hit" If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-3, and if it is determined that the opening designation command does not designate "small hit" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next (step S32-8).

In step S35-3, it is determined whether or not it is during the consecutive playing period, and if it is determined that it is not during the consecutive playing period (No), the process proceeds to step S35-4, and it is determined that it is during the consecutive playing period. If so (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-5.
Here, if "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous playing period, it is determined that the continuous playing period is not in progress, and if "1" is set in the continuous playing period flag area, It is determined that it is during the consecutive chance period.
In step S35-4, normal small winning effect start processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S32-8) is performed. In the normal small winning performance start processing, a small winning performance is started.
The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a normal small winning performance selection table in which the correspondence between each type of "small winning" and the mode of the small winning performance (small winning performance number) is registered.
In the normal time small hit production start processing, first, the type of "small hit" specified by the opening designation command is confirmed. In addition, the normal small hit effect selection table is read. Then, based on the confirmed type of "small hit" and the normal small win effect selection table, the mode of the small win effect (small win effect number) is determined.
Furthermore, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (stop effect number) of the determined small hit effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a small winning effect based on the set effect control table is started.
In step S35-5, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command designates "V winning possible small win"("small winning 1" to "small winning 3"). If it is determined that "win" is not specified (No), the process proceeds to step S35-6, and if it is determined that the opening specifying command specifies "V win possible small win" (Yes) , the process proceeds to step S35-7.

In step S35-6, a small winning effect start process is executed at the time of defeat, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the small winning performance start processing at the time of defeat, the small winning performance is started.
In the small hit performance start processing at the time of defeat, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous battle performance is being executed. Here, when "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and when "0" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. , it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed.
Then, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, the value of the individual battle counter is checked. Also, in step S36-13, the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is referred to, and the small winning effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter is read. Furthermore, the effect control table corresponding to the read small hit effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a small winning effect based on the set effect control table is started.
Furthermore, "1" is subtracted from the value of the individual battle number counter. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the individual battle number counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the individual battle number counter is "0", "0" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. This ends the continuous battle effect. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the individual battle number counter is not "0" (is "1" or more), the state in which "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area is maintained. Thereby, the continuous battle production is continued.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (small win effect number) of the small win effect at the time of defeat set in step S33-11 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a small winning effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S35-7, a lottery process for indicating the number of rounds is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-8. In the round number suggesting effect lottery process, the aspect of the round number suggesting effect (round number suggesting effect number) is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "V win possible small win" is won during the continuous playing period, and when the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the number of rounds Suggestion production is executed.
"Round number suggestion effect" is the number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state that occurs in response to the V prize (the number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the occurrence of the jackpot game state) It is a production that suggests the number).
In this embodiment, as the mode of the round number suggesting effect, a mode without addition and a mode with addition are set.

The non-addition mode is a mode of the number-of-rounds suggesting effect composed only of the initial notification effect.
The mode with addition is a mode of the number-of-rounds suggesting effect composed of an initial notification effect and an additional effect of 1 [time] or more.
In the round number suggesting effect, the acquired round number suggesting icon is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23 . In the round number suggesting effect, the number of winning round number suggesting icons displayed on the display screen 23a suggests the number of round games to be executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the non-addition mode, the number of acquired round number suggesting icons finally displayed in the initial notification effect matches the number of round games corresponding to the type of the winning "minor win".
That is, at the start of the initial notification effect, if the same number of acquisition round number indication icons as the number of round games corresponding to the type of the winning "small win" is displayed, then the displayed acquisition round The number of number-suggestion icons is never increased.
On the other hand, at the start of the initial notification effect, if the icon indicating the number of acquired rounds is displayed less than the number of round games corresponding to the type of "small hit" won, by the end of the initial notification effect, The number of displayed icons indicating the number of acquired rounds is increased to the same number as the number of round games corresponding to the type of "small win" won.
On the other hand, in the mode with an addition, in the initial notification effect, the obtained round number suggesting icons are displayed in a number smaller than the number of round games corresponding to the type of the winning "small win".
After that, one or more acquired round number suggesting icons are added (increased) in each additional effect.
Then, the number of winning round number suggesting icons displayed in the final round is increased to the same number as the number of round games corresponding to the type of the winning "minor win".

In this embodiment, a first round number suggesting effect and a second round number suggesting effect having different effect contents are set as types of the round number suggesting effect.
When the "first round number suggesting effect" is selected, the addition mode is always selected as the mode of the round number suggesting effect. That is, when the first round number suggesting effect is selected, the additional effect of 1 [time] or more is always executed.
When the "second round number suggesting effect" is selected, as the mode of the round number suggesting effect, the non-adding mode or the adding mode is selected.
In the present embodiment, when the "V win possible small win" is won via the continuous battle effect, the "first round number suggesting effect" is selected as the type of the round number suggesting effect. On the other hand, when the player wins the "small winning potential V prize" via the one-shot battle effect, the "second round number suggesting effect" is selected as the type of the round number suggesting effect.

The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a round number suggesting performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the round number suggesting performance lottery random number and the mode of the round number suggesting performance (round number suggesting performance number) is registered. there is
Further, as the round number suggesting effect lottery table, a first round number suggesting effect lottery table corresponding to the case of passing through the continuous battle effect, and a second round number suggesting effect lottery table corresponding to the case of passing through the single battle effect, is stored.
Then, in the first round number suggesting effect lottery table, only the modes of round number suggesting effects (round number suggesting effect numbers) belonging to (corresponding to) the mode with addition are registered (belonging to the mode without adding (corresponding) ) Mode of round number suggesting effect (round number suggesting effect number) is not registered).
On the other hand, in the second round number suggesting effect lottery table, the mode of the round number suggesting effect (round number suggesting effect number) belonging to (corresponding to) the add-on mode, and the round number suggesting effect belonging to (corresponding to) the non-adding mode Aspect (round number suggestion number) and are registered.
As the first round number suggesting effect lottery table, a first round number suggesting effect lottery table corresponding to each type of "small win"("small win 1" to "small win 3") is stored.
Also, as a second round number suggesting effect lottery table, a first round number suggesting effect lottery table corresponding to each type of "small win"("small win 1" to "small win 3") is stored.
Then, on each round number suggesting effect lottery table, the round in which the same number of acquisition round number suggesting icons as the number of rounds related to each type of "small win" corresponding to the round number suggesting effect lottery table is finally displayed. A mode of number suggesting effect (round number suggesting effect number) is registered.

In the round number suggesting effect lottery process, first, a round number suggesting effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area.
When it is determined that "1" is set in the continuous battle performance flag area, the first round number suggesting performance lottery table corresponding to the type of "small win" specified by the opening designation command is read. Then, based on the obtained round number suggesting effect lottery random number and the first round number suggesting effect lottery table, the aspect of the round number suggesting effect (round number suggesting effect number) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "0" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, the second round number suggesting effect lottery table corresponding to the type of "small winning" specified by the opening specifying command is read. Then, based on the obtained round number suggesting effect lottery random number and the second round number suggesting effect lottery table, the aspect of the round number suggesting effect (round number suggesting effect number) is determined.

In step S35-8, a battle icon lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-9. In the battle icon lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous battle effect (whether or not to acquire a battle icon).
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the start information stored in the start information storage area at the start of the small winning game state depends on the type of battle effect (single-shot battle effect or continuous battle effect) executed after the end of the big win game state. is suggested (step S9-8).
Specifically, depending on the type of battle production executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state (single-shot battle production or continuous battle production), the special figure that was stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small winning gaming state It is suggested whether or not the 2 start information includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that the special combination has been won.
In particular, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of battle production (single-shot battle production or continuous battle production) executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it was stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small winning gaming state. Of the special figure 2 starting information, the special figure 2 starting information in which the start determination is executed in the first to third is suggested whether or not the special figure 2 starting information indicating that the specific role is won is included. be.
Then, the battle icon is an effect that suggests (informs) that a continuous battle effect will be executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
In the present embodiment, when a battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of a battle type suggestion effect (jackpot effect), which will be described later, a continuous battle is performed after the jackpot game state ends. A performance is performed. That is, the notification effect of each time (maximum 3 [times]) executed after the end of the jackpot game state becomes an individual battle effect (continuous battle effect).
On the other hand, when the battle icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggesting effect, the continuous battle effect is not executed after the end of the big win game state. That is, each time variation production executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a single-shot battle production.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small winning game state depending on whether or not the battle icon is displayed during execution of the battle type suggestive effect Among them, it is suggested whether or not the special figure 2 starting information indicating that the special role was won was included in the special figure 2 starting information in which the starting determination is executed in the first to third.
Then, when the continuous battle effect is executed after the jackpot game state ends (when the battle icon is displayed while the jackpot game state is occurring), when the one-shot battle effect is executed after the jackpot game state ends ( When the battle icon is not displayed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state), the special role was won in the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small win game state. The expected value for the inclusion of special figure 2 start information indicating that is high.

In the battle icon lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a continuous battle effect execution condition (battle icon acquisition condition) is satisfied.
In this embodiment, when the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is "3" or more, it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is satisfied, and the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is less than "3" In some cases, it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is not satisfied.
Then, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is satisfied, a battle icon lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the continuous battle effect (whether or not to obtain a battle icon).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the battle icon lottery is not executed and the continuous battle effect is not executed (battle icon is not acquired).

Next, the battle icon lottery will be described.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a battle icon lottery table in which winning values of the battle icon lottery are registered.
Also, as a battle icon lottery table, a battle icon lottery table corresponding to each pre-determination result pattern is stored.
"Pre-determination result pattern" refers to a pattern of results of pre-determination. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, "Pattern A" to "Pattern D" are set as pre-determination result patterns.
"Pattern A" is the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) out of the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the first hold information that the notification display is executed It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that you have won a specific role. In addition, in "Pattern A", the second and third of the pending information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) are displayed. The content of the hold information to be held does not matter.
"Pattern B" is the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) out of the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the first hold information that the notification display is executed The reservation information that designates that the specific combination has not been won, and the second notification display is executed is the pre-determination result pattern that designates that the specific combination has been won. It should be noted that, in the "pattern B", of the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area), the suspension in which the notification display is executed third The content of the information is irrelevant.
"Pattern C" is the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) out of the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the first hold information that the notification display is executed Designate that you have not won a specific role, specify that the second pending information to be displayed has not won a specific role, and specify that the third reserved information to be displayed is a specific role. It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that you have won.
"Pattern D" is the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) out of the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the first hold information that the notification display is executed Designate that you have not won a specific role, specify that the second pending information to be displayed has not won a specific role, and specify that the third reserved information to be displayed is a specific role. It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that you have not won.
The probability of winning the battle icon lottery is determined by the battle icon lottery table corresponding to "pattern C", the battle icon lottery table corresponding to "pattern B", the battle icon lottery table corresponding to "pattern A", and the battle icon lottery table corresponding to "pattern D". ” is set to be higher (from high to low) in the order of the battle icon lottery table corresponding to “.

In the battle icon lottery, first, a battle icon lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, confirm the contents of the pending information (special figure 2 starting information) stored in the second pending information storage area (special figure 2 starting information storage area). Then, the pre-determination result patterns (“pattern A” to “pattern D”) are determined. Further, the battle icon lottery table corresponding to the determined pre-determination result pattern is read.
Then, based on the obtained battle icon lottery random number and the battle icon lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous battle effect (whether or not to obtain a battle icon). At this time, if the value of the obtained battle icon lottery random number matches the hit value registered in the read battle icon lottery table, it is determined that the continuous battle effect will be executed (battle icon will be acquired). However, if the value of the acquired battle icon lottery random number does not match the winning value registered in the read battle icon lottery table, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not executed (the battle icon is not acquired). .
In addition, pre-determination result pattern information indicating the determined pre-determination result pattern is stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .

In step S35-9, a celebration icon lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-10. In the celebration icon lottery process, it is determined whether or not to obtain a celebration icon.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, depending on whether or not the celebration icon is displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, advance determination is made based on the start information stored in the start information storage area at the start of the small winning game state. The result of (step S9-8) is suggested.
Specifically, depending on whether or not the celebration icon is displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, the special figure 2 start information ( It is suggested whether or not the special figure 2 starting information indicating that the special role was won was included in all special figure 2 starting information).
In this embodiment, when the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination is won is not included in the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small winning gaming state , the celebration icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggestion effect.
That is, when the celebration icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggesting production, it was stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small winning game state. It is determined that the special figure 2 starting information indicating that the special role was won was included in the special figure 2 starting information.
If a battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggesting effect, the celebration icon will not be displayed during the execution of the battle type suggesting effect. .

In the celebration icon lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the celebration icon acquisition condition is satisfied.
In this embodiment, (1) that it is determined not to acquire the battle icon in step S35-8, (2) that the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is "1" or more, and (3) Hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area), holding information (special figure 2 start information) specifying that a specific role was won It is determined that the congratulation icon acquisition condition is satisfied when all of the above are satisfied.
Then, when it is determined that the conditions for acquiring the celebration icon are satisfied, a celebration icon lottery is executed to determine whether or not to acquire the celebration icon.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the conditions for acquiring the celebration icon are not satisfied, the celebration icon lottery is not executed, and it is decided not to acquire the celebration icon.

Next, the celebration icon lottery will be described.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a celebration icon lottery table in which winning values of the celebration icon lottery are registered.
In the celebration icon lottery, first, a celebration icon lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired celebration icon lottery random number and the celebration icon lottery table, it is determined whether or not to acquire the celebration icon. At this time, if the value of the obtained celebration icon lottery random number matches the hit value registered in the celebration icon lottery table, it is determined that the celebration icon is obtained, and the value of the acquired celebration icon lottery random number is If it does not match the winning value registered in the read celebration icon lottery table, it is determined that the celebration icon is not acquired.

In step S35-10, a facing character lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-11. In the confronting character lottery process, the type of confronting character that appears (is displayed) in the battle type suggesting effect is determined.
In the pachinko machine 1, a jackpot performance is executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. As types of jackpot effects, a "battle type suggestive effect" and a "judge effect", which will be described later, are set.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, when a ``small win'' is won by a special symbol lottery executed during the continuous playing period, and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. Then, as a jackpot effect, a battle type suggestion effect is executed.
The “battle type suggestive effect” is an effect that suggests the type of battle effect (single-shot battle effect or continuous battle effect) to be executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
In particular, in the battle type suggesting effect, whether or not to acquire a battle icon during execution of the battle type suggesting effect is suggested depending on the type of confronting character that appears.
Specifically, in the battle type suggestion effect, an effect image in which a friendly character and an enemy character face each other is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23. The type of battle effect to be executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is suggested (notified).
At this time, if the two characters facing each other start a battle, a battle icon is displayed during the execution of the battle type suggesting effect, suggesting that the continuous battle effect will be executed after the jackpot game state ends ( notification).
On the other hand, if the two characters facing each other do not start the battle, the battle icon will not be displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestive effect, suggesting that the one-shot battle effect will be executed after the jackpot game state ends ( notification).

Then, in the battle type suggesting effect, the battle type suggesting effect is executed by combining the type of friendly character selected in advance and the type of confronting character to be confronted as an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as "combat combination"). An expected value for acquiring a battle icon is suggested (a continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state).
Here, the "expected value" means that when the match combination is determined (displayed), the battle icon is acquired during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect (the continuous battle effect is executed after the jackpot game state ends). It refers to the degree of possibility that
In this embodiment, one type of enemy character is determined from among six types of enemy characters (“enemy character A” to “enemy character F”) as the confronting character that appears in the battle type suggestive effect.
Then, when the continuous battle performance is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, the continuous battle performance (individual battle performance of each time) is executed with the confronting characters appearing in the battle type suggesting performance as opponents.

The ROM of the production control circuit 300 stores a confronting character lottery table in which correspondences between confronting character lottery random number values and confronting character types (“enemy character A” to “enemy character F”) are registered. there is
In addition, as a confrontation character lottery table, a confrontation character corresponding to each combination of the acquisition status of the battle icon, the acquisition status of the celebration icon, and the type of allied characters ("ally character A" to "ally character C") A lottery table is stored.
In the confronting character lottery process, first, a confronting character lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of the teammate character specified by the teammate character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, and the acquisition status of the battle icon determined in step S35-8 (the acquisition status of the battle icon is determined). or not) and the acquisition status of the celebration icon determined in step S35-9 (whether or not the acquisition of the celebration icon is determined), and the facing character lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired confronting character lottery random number and the confronting character lottery table, the type of confronting character is determined.

In step S35-11, a battle type suggestion effect setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-12. In the battle type suggesting effect setting process, the mode (jackpot effect number) of the battle type suggesting effect is determined.
A ROM of a performance control circuit 300 stores a battle type suggesting performance lottery table in which correspondence between a battle type suggesting performance lottery random number value and a battle type suggesting performance mode (jackpot performance number) is registered. A jackpot effect number related to the battle type suggestive effect is registered in each battle type suggestive effect lottery table.
In addition, as a battle type suggestion production lottery table, the acquisition status of the battle icon, the acquisition status of the celebration icon, the type of ally character ("ally character A" to "ally character C"), and the type of confronting character ("enemy Character A" to "Enemy Character F"), and a battle type suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to each combination is stored.
In each battle type suggesting production lottery table, a combination of the acquisition status of the battle icon corresponding to the battle type suggestion production lottery table, the acquisition status of the celebration icon, the type of the ally character, and the type of the facing character. A jackpot effect number related to the battle type suggestive effect corresponding to is registered.

In the battle type suggesting effect setting process, first, a battle type suggesting effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of the teammate character specified by the teammate character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, and the acquisition status of the battle icon determined in step S35-8 (the acquisition status of the battle icon is determined). or not), the acquisition status of the celebration icon determined in step S35-9 (whether or not the acquisition of the celebration icon is determined), and the type of facing character determined in step S35-10. , the battle type suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the obtained battle type suggesting effect lottery random number and the battle type suggesting effect lottery table, the mode (jackpot performance number) of the battle type suggesting effect is determined.
Furthermore, the mode (jackpot effect number) of the determined battle type suggestion effect is stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .

In step S35-12, small winning effect start processing is executed when winning, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S32-8) is performed. In the small winning performance start processing at the time of winning, the small winning performance is started.
In the process of starting a small winning effect at the time of winning, first, it is determined whether or not a continuous battle effect is being executed. Here, when "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and when "0" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. , it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed.
Then, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, the value of the individual battle counter is checked. Further, in step S36-13, the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is referred to, and the small winning effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter is read. Furthermore, the effect control table corresponding to the read small hit effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a small winning effect based on the set effect control table is started. Further, the value of the individual battle number counter is reset, and "0" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. This ends the continuous battle effect.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous battle production is not being executed, the mode of the small winning production at the time of winning corresponding to the single battle production (small winning production number) as the mode of the small winning production at the time of winning (small winning production number). to decide. In addition, the effect control table corresponding to the mode of the determined small winning effect (small winning effect number) is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a small winning effect based on the set effect control table is started.

Next, a description will be given of the jackpot effect management process executed in step S32-8.
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a jackpot performance management process.
When the jackpot effect management process is executed in step S32-8, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S36-1.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2, where the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the process proceeds to step S36-8.
Here, whether or not the opening designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the opening designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command designates "jackpot"("small hit 1 jackpot" to "small hit 6 consecutive jackpot", "jackpot 1" or "small hit 2") However, if it is determined that the opening designation command designates a "jackpot" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and if it is determined that the opening designation command does not designate a "jackpot" (No ), the process proceeds to step S36-8.
In step S36-3, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command designates "small winning continuous jackpot"("small winning 1 continuous jackpot" to "small winning 6 continuous jackpot"). If it is determined that "hit continuous jackpot" is not specified ("jackpot 1" or "jackpot 2" is specified) (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4, and the opening designation command is "small hit If it is determined that "continuous jackpot" is specified (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-6.

In step S36-4, a judge effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-5. In the judge effect lottery process, the mode (jackpot effect number) of the judge effect (jackpot effect) is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 2" is won, a judge effect is executed as a jackpot effect.
The “judge effect” is a effect that suggests whether or not the time saving control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the consecutive chance period is started).
In this embodiment, the judge effect includes a teammate character selection effect and a judge result effect.
The “friend character selection effect” is an effect for selecting the type of the friend character (“friend character A” to “friend character C”) according to the player's pressing operation of the effect button 5b.
Specifically, a teammate character selection image is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the teammate character selection effect. Further, during execution of the teammate character selection effect, an operation effective period is set during which the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is valid.
The display of the teammate character selection image is started in response to the start of the teammate character selection effect. In the ally character selection image, one type of ally character among "ally character A" to "ally character C" is selected.
The effective period of operation is started when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the friendly character presentation. Then, during the operation valid period, each time the effect button 5b is pressed (every time the first operation signal is input from the first operation detection switch 24), the ally selected in the ally character selection image is displayed. Character type is changed.
The valid operation period ends when a predetermined period of time elapses from its start. Then, in the ally character selection effect, at the end of the operation valid period, the type of ally character selected in the ally character selection image is determined (confirmed) as the type of ally character selected by the ally character selection effect. be done.
Then, at the end of the teammate character selection performance, teammate character selection information designating the kind of teammate character selected by the teammate character selection performance is stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control circuit 300. - 特許庁
As a result, when the consecutive chance period starts after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the friendly character who appears in the battle production (single-shot battle production or continuous battle production) executed during the consecutive chance period A friendly character of the type selected by the character selection effect is set.

The “judgment result effect” is an effect that suggests whether or not the time saving control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the consecutive chance period is started). At this time, in the judge result production, depending on the production content corresponding to the type of ally character selected by the ally character selection production, whether or not the time saving control is started after the jackpot game state ends (the consecutive chance period is started) or not) is suggested.
In this embodiment, as types of judge effects, "judge effect A" corresponding to "friend character A", "judge effect B" corresponding to "friend character B", and "friend character C" corresponding to " Judge performance C” is set.
In the "judgment effect A", the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 displays the effect image by the "friend character A".
In the "judgment effect B", the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 displays the effect image by the "friend character B".
In the "judgment effect C", the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 displays an effect image by the "friend character C".
Then, in the “judge performance A” to “judge performance C”, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the consecutive chance period is started) depending on the performance contents different from each other. It is suggested.
In the "judgment effect A", at a predetermined timing, at predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c of the drum type display device 24, based on whether or not the same type of identification information is displayed (stopped), It is suggested whether or not the time saving control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the consecutive chance period is started).
In the "judgment performance B", the operation of the performance button 5b during the operation valid period set during the execution of the judge performance, or the performance displayed according to the elapse of the operation valid period, the jackpot game state. It is suggested whether the time saving control is started after the end (whether the consecutive chance period is started).
In the “judge effect C”, based on the number of judge icons displayed during execution of the judge effect (the number of acquired judge icons), whether or not time saving control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (continuous whether the chang period is started or not) is suggested.

The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a judge performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the judge performance lottery random number and the mode of the judge performance (jackpot performance number) is registered.
In addition, as a judge production lottery table, judges corresponding to various types of jackpot gaming states to be started (“small win 1 continuous jackpot” to “small win 6 continuous jackpot”, “jackpot 1” and “jackpot 2”) A performance lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a judge production lottery table corresponding to "jackpot 2", when "jackpot 2" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) executed during the execution of time saving control A corresponding judge performance lottery table and a judge performance lottery table corresponding to the case of winning "jackpot 2" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) executed while the time saving control is stopped. , are stored.
Then, on the judge production lottery table corresponding to "small win 1 continuous jackpot" to "small win 6 continuous jackpot" or "jackpot 1", time saving control is started after the jackpot gaming state ends (continuous chance period is A mode (jackpot effect number) of the judge effect related to the effect content suggesting that the game is started is registered.
On the other hand, the judge production lottery table corresponding to the case of winning the "jackpot 2" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) executed during the execution of the time saving control shows the jackpot game state A mode (jackpot effect number) of the judge effect related to the effect content suggesting that the time saving control is started (the consecutive chance period is started) after the end of is registered.
On the other hand, the judge production lottery table corresponding to the case of winning the "jackpot 2" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) executed while the time saving control is stopped shows the jackpot game state. A mode (jackpot effect number) of the judge effect related to the effect content suggesting that the time saving control is not started (the consecutive chance period is not started) after the end of is registered.

In the judge effect lottery process, first, a judge effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the judge effect lottery table corresponding to the winning type specified by the opening specifying command is read. At this time, if the winning type specified by the opening specifying command is "jackpot 2", it is determined whether or not "jackpot 2" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time saving control. , the judgment effect lottery table corresponding to this determination result is read. Then, based on the acquired judge performance lottery random number and the judge performance lottery table, the mode of judge performance (jackpot performance number) is determined.

In step S36-5, a judgment performance start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-8. In the judgment effect start process, a big win effect is started.
In the judge effect start process, the effect control table corresponding to the judgment effect mode (jackpot effect number) determined in step S36-4 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a judge effect (big hit effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
In the judge effect start process, next, “1” is set in the jackpot gaming state flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .
In step S36-6, it is determined whether or not it is during the consecutive playing period, and if it is determined that it is not during the consecutive playing period (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4, and it is determined that it is during the consecutive playing period. If so (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-7.
Here, if "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous playing period, it is determined that the continuous playing period is not in progress, and if "1" is set in the continuous playing period flag area, It is determined that it is during the consecutive chance period.
In step S36-7, a battle type suggestion effect start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-8. In the battle type suggestion production start process, a big hit production is started.
In the battle type suggesting effect start process, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (jackpot effect number) of the battle type suggesting effect stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S35-11 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a battle type suggestion effect (jackpot effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
In addition, in the battle type suggestive effect start processing, “1” is set in the jackpot gaming state flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . In addition, “1” is set in the battle type suggesting effecting flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .

In step S36-8, it is determined whether or not an ending designation command has been received. If it is determined that an ending designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-9, where an ending designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9).
Here, whether or not the ending designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the ending designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .
In step S36-9, it is determined whether or not the end of the jackpot game state is designated, and if it is determined that the end of the jackpot game state is designated (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-10, If it is determined that the termination of the jackpot gaming state is not designated (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9).
Here, when "1" is set in the flag area during the jackpot game state of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, it is determined that the end of the jackpot game state is designated, and the flag area is set to the jackpot game state flag area. When "0" is set, it is determined that the termination of the jackpot game state is not specified.

In step S36-10, it is determined whether or not the battle type suggesting effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the battle type suggesting effect is not being executed (the judge effect is being executed) (No), step When the process proceeds to S36-11 and it is determined that the battle type suggestion effect is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-12.
Here, when "1" is set in the battle type suggesting effect in progress flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, it is determined that the battle type suggesting effect is being executed, and the battle type suggesting effect in progress flag area is determined. is set to "0", it is determined that the battle type suggesting effect is not being executed.
In step S36-11, a rush state suggestion effect start process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9). In the rush state suggesting effect start processing, the ending effect is started.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the ending effect is executed during the ending period during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. As the types of ending effects, a "drawing state suggestive effect" and an "entering battle type suggestive effect", which will be described later, are set.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "jackpot 1" or the "jackpot 2" is won, the rush state suggesting presentation is executed as the ending presentation.
The “rush state suggestion effect” is a effect that suggests (informs) whether or not to enter the “continuous chance period” after the end of the jackpot game state.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a rush state suggestive effect selection table in which the correspondence between each aspect of the judge effect (jackpot effect number) and the mode of the rush state suggestive effect (ending effect number) is registered. there is
In the rush state suggestion effect start processing, first, the type of judge effect (jackpot effect number) determined in step S36-4 is confirmed. In addition, the rush state suggestion effect selection table is read. Then, based on the confirmed type of judge effect (jackpot effect number) and the entry state suggesting effect selection table, the form (ending effect number) of the rushing state suggesting effect is determined.
Then, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (ending effect number) of the determined rush state suggesting effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a rush state suggestion effect (ending effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
In addition, in the rush state suggesting effect start processing, “0” is set in the jackpot gaming state flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .

At step S36-12, it is determined whether or not the battle icon has been obtained during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the acquisition of the battle icon has been determined at step S35-8), and it is determined that the battle icon has been obtained. If so (Yes), the process moves to step S36-13, and if it is determined that the battle icon has not been acquired (No), the process moves to step S36-14.

At step S36-13, a continuous battle effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-14. In the continuous battle effect lottery process, the mode of continuous battle effect (continuous battle effect number) is determined.
The ROM of the performance control circuit 300 stores a continuous battle performance lottery table in which correspondences between values of continuous battle performance lottery random numbers and modes of continuous battle performance (continuous battle performance numbers) are registered.
In addition, as a continuous battle production lottery table, the types of allied characters (“Allied Character A” to “Allied Character C”), the types of confronting characters (“Enemy Character A” to “Enemy Character F”), and the preliminary judgment results Patterns (“Pattern A” to “Pattern D”) and continuous battle effect lottery tables corresponding to each combination are stored.
In each continuous battle effect lottery table, a series related to a continuous battle effect in which a friendly character related to the type corresponding to the continuous battle effect lottery table and a facing character related to the type corresponding to the continuous battle effect lottery table face each other A battle production number is registered.

The continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to “Pattern A” has a continuous battle consisting of 1 [time] individual battle effect, 1 [time] stop effect, and 1 [time] small win effect. A continuous battle effect number related to the effect is registered.
Then, in the continuous battle effect corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern A", in the first individual battle effect, the contents that give the friendly character an advantage (this implementation In the form, an effect image is displayed that states that the ally character successfully attacks the enemy character. Also, in the first stop effect, a effect image showing the victory of the ally character is displayed. In addition, in the first small win effect, a effect image showing that the specific combination has been won is displayed.

The continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern B" has a continuous battle consisting of 2 [times] individual battle effects, 2 [times] stop effects, and 2 [times] small winning effects. A continuous battle effect number related to the effect is registered.
Then, in the continuous battle effect corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern B", in the first individual battle effect, the ally character is disadvantaged (this implementation In the form, an effect image is displayed, in which an attack by a friendly character against an enemy character fails). Also, in the first stop effect, a effect image is displayed showing that the attack by the ally character has failed. In addition, in the first small winning effect, a effect image is displayed that indicates that the continuous battle effect will continue.
In addition, in the second individual battle production, content that gives the friendly character an advantage (in this embodiment, content that the friendly character succeeds in counterattacking the enemy character after the friendly character avoids the enemy character's attack on the friendly character). is displayed. Also, in the second stop effect, a effect image showing the victory of the ally character is displayed. In addition, in the second small win effect, a effect image showing that the specific combination has been won is displayed.

The continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern C" has a continuous battle consisting of 3 [times] individual battle effects, 3 [times] stop effects, and 3 [times] small winning effects. A continuous battle effect number related to the effect is registered.
Then, in the continuous battle effect corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern C", in the first individual battle effect, the content that the ally character is disadvantaged (this implementation In the form, an effect image is displayed, in which an attack by a friendly character against an enemy character fails). Also, in the first stop effect, a effect image is displayed showing that the attack by the ally character has failed. In addition, in the first small winning effect, a effect image is displayed that indicates that the continuous battle effect will continue.
In addition, in the second individual battle effect, an effect image is displayed that puts the ally character at a disadvantage (in this embodiment, the enemy character succeeds in attacking the ally character). Also, in the second stop effect, a effect image showing that the ally character has fallen is displayed. Also, in the second small winning effect, a effect image is displayed to indicate that the continuous battle effect will continue.
In addition, in the third individual battle effect, an effect image is displayed that gives the ally character an advantage (in this embodiment, the ally character revives (stands up)). Also, in the third stop effect, a effect image showing the victory of the ally character is displayed. In addition, in the third small win effect, a effect image showing that the specific combination has been won is displayed.

The continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern D" has a continuous battle consisting of 4 [times] individual battle effects, 4 [times] stop effects, and 4 [times] small winning effects. A continuous battle effect number related to the effect is registered.
Then, in the continuous battle effect corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern D", in the first individual battle effect, the ally character will be disadvantaged (this implementation In the form, an effect image is displayed, in which an attack by a friendly character against an enemy character fails). Also, in the first stop effect, a effect image is displayed showing that the attack by the ally character has failed. In addition, in the first small winning effect, a effect image is displayed that indicates that the continuous battle effect will continue.
In addition, in the second individual battle effect, an effect image is displayed that puts the ally character at a disadvantage (in this embodiment, the enemy character succeeds in attacking the ally character). Also, in the second stop effect, a effect image showing that the ally character has fallen is displayed. Also, in the second small winning effect, a effect image is displayed to indicate that the continuous battle effect will continue.
In addition, in the third individual battle effect, an effect image is displayed that puts the ally character at a disadvantage (in this embodiment, the ally character does not revive (cannot stand up)). Also, in the third stop effect, a effect image showing the defeat of the ally character is displayed. In addition, in the third small winning effect, a effect image showing the end of the continuous battle effect (transition to the single-shot battle effect) is displayed.

Further, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores continuous battle effect control data corresponding to each aspect of the continuous battle effect (each continuous battle effect number).
The "continuous battle effect control data" is information for executing (controlling) the continuous battle effect. The continuous battle effect control data includes information specifying the number of individual battle effects included in the continuous battle effect, information specifying the mode (variable effect number) of each individual battle effect (variable effect), and information specifying the individual battle effect (variable effect number) of each time. Including information specifying the mode (variable effect number) of the stop effect executed after the end of the effect, information specifying the mode (variable effect number) of the small hit effect executed after the end of each individual battle effect, etc. It is configured.
Specifically, in the continuous battle effect control data corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern A", one individual battle effect (variable effect) mode Information specifying (variation performance number), information specifying one stop performance mode (variation performance number), and information designating one small win performance mode (variation performance number) are included.
In addition, the continuous battle effect control data corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern B" includes two individual battle effect (variable effect) modes (variable effect number), information specifying the mode of stop performance for two times (variation performance number), and information specifying the mode of small winning performance for two times (variation performance number).
In addition, the continuous battle effect control data corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern C" or "Pattern D" contains three individual battle effects (variable effects). Information that specifies the mode (variable performance number), information that specifies the mode of stop performance for 3 times (variable performance number), and information that specifies the mode of small hit performance for 3 times (variable performance number). there is

In the continuous battle effect lottery process, first, a continuous battle effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter.
Also, the type of the friendly character designated by the friendly character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the type of the confronting character determined in step S35-10, and the type determined in step S35-8. The pre-determined result pattern and the determined result pattern are confirmed, and the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmed result is read out.
Then, based on the obtained continuous battle effect lottery random number and the continuous battle effect lottery table, the mode of the continuous battle effect (continuous battle effect number) is determined.
Furthermore, the continuous battle effect control data corresponding to the determined continuous battle effect number is read, and the read continuous battle effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, after the end of the big win game state, continuous battle effects (fluctuation effect, stop effect, small win effect) based on the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 are executed.
In addition, in the continuous battle effect lottery process, “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .

In step S36-14, a rush battle type suggestive effect start process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9). In the rush battle type suggestion effect start processing, the ending effect is started.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a ``small win'' is won by a special symbol lottery executed during the continuous playing period and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, As an ending effect, a rush battle type suggestion effect is executed.
"Rush battle type suggestive effect" is an effect that suggests (informs) the type of battle effect ("single battle effect" or "continuous battle effect") to be executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, there are a mode corresponding to entering into a single battle effect and a mode corresponding to entering into a continuous battle effect as modes (ending effect number) of the entering battle type suggesting effect (ending effect number). is set.
In the rush battle type suggestion effect related to the mode corresponding to the case of entering the one-shot battle effect, the entry into the one-shot battle effect is suggested (notified).
In the rush battle type suggesting effect related to the mode corresponding to the case of entering the continuous battle effect, the entry into the continuous battle effect is suggested (notified).
In the rush battle type suggestive effect start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the battle icon has been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the acquisition of the battle icon has been determined in step S35-8).
Then, when it is determined that the battle icon has been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (the acquisition of the battle icon is determined in step S35-8), the mode of the rush battle type suggestive effect (ending effect number) , determine the mode corresponding to the case of entering into the continuous battle presentation.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the battle icon has not been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (the acquisition of the battle icon has not been determined in step S35-8), the mode of the entry battle type suggestive effect (ending effect number), the aspect corresponding to the case of rushing into the one-shot battle production is determined.
Also, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (ending effect number) of the determined entry battle effect suggesting effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, the rush battle type suggestion effect (ending effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
In addition, in the rush battle type suggestive effect start processing, “0” is set in the jackpot gaming state flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . Furthermore, "0" is set in the flag area during the battle type suggestion effect of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. - 特許庁

Next, the V winning effect management process executed in step S32-9 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the V winning effect management process.
When the V winning effect management process is executed in step S32-9, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the V winning designation command has been received. If it is determined that the V winning designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and the V winning designation command is transmitted. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S32-10) is performed.
Here, whether or not the V winning designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the V winning designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .
In step S37-2, a V prize notification effect start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-3. In the V winning notification effect start processing, the V winning notification effect is started.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the passage of the game ball through the specific area is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the V winning notification effect is executed to suggest (notify) the passage of the game ball through the V area. be done.
In the V winning notification effect start processing, the effect control table corresponding to the V winning notification effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, the V winning notification effect is started based on the set effect control table.

In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not it is during the consecutive playing period, and if it is determined that it is during the consecutive playing period (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4, and it is determined that it is not during the consecutive playing period. If so (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-10).
Here, if "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous playing period, it is determined that the continuous playing period is not in progress, and if "1" is set in the continuous playing period flag area, It is determined that it is during the consecutive chance period.
In step S37-4, a round number suggesting effect start process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-10). In the round number suggesting effect start processing, the round number suggesting effect is started.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores round number suggesting effect control data corresponding to each aspect of the round number suggesting effect (each round number suggesting effect number).
The "round number suggesting effect control data" is information for executing (controlling) the round number suggesting effect. The round number suggesting effect control data includes information specifying the mode (initial announcement effect) of the initial notification effect included in the round number suggesting effect, information specifying the number of additional effects included in the round number suggesting effect, each time It is configured including information specifying the mode of the additional effect (adding effect number), information specifying the execution trigger of each additional effect, and the like. In this embodiment, the timing for executing each additional performance is set during the occurrence of the small winning game state or during the occurrence of the big winning game state.
In the round number suggesting effect start process, the round number suggesting effect control data corresponding to the round number suggesting effect mode (round number suggesting effect number) determined in step S35-7 is read. Then, the read round number suggestion effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .
In addition, by referring to the round number suggestion effect control data set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the mode of the initial notification effect (initial notification effect number) is confirmed. In addition, the effect control table corresponding to the aspect of the confirmed initial notification effect (initial notification effect number) is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, the initial notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, by referring to the round number suggesting effect control data set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the number of times of the additional effect is confirmed. Then, when the number of times of the additional performance is "1" or more, the number of times of the additional performance is set in the additional performance counter, and "1" is set in the additional performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control circuit 300. - 特許庁.

Next, the additional effect management process executed in step S32-10 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the additional effect management process.
When the add-on effect management process is executed in step S32-10, as shown in FIG. 44, the process first proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the addition effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, and if it is determined that "1" is set in the addition effect flag area ( If Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-2, and if it is determined that "1" is not set in the addition effect flag area ("0" is set) (No), a series of processing is performed. After finishing, the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11).
In step S38-2, the number-of-rounds suggestive effect control data set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is referred to, and an opportunity to execute the additional effect corresponding to the current value of the counter for the number of times of the additional effect has arrived. It is determined whether or not, and if it is determined that the execution opportunity of the additional production has arrived (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and if it is determined that the execution opportunity of the additional production has not arrived (No) In step S32-11, the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11).
In step S38-3, an additional effect start process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11). In the add-on performance start processing, the add-on effect is started.
In the add-on effect start processing, first, the value of the add-on effect frequency counter is confirmed. Further, by referring to the round number suggesting effect control data set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the added effect number corresponding to the confirmed value of the added effect frequency counter is read. Furthermore, the effect control table corresponding to the read additional effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . By this, the additional production based on the set production control table is started.
In addition, "1" is subtracted from the value of the number of times of additional effects. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-additional-effects counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the add-on effect counter is "0", the add-on effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is set to "0". On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the add-on performance number counter is not "0" (is "1" or more), the state in which "1" is set in the add-on effect flag area is maintained.

Next, the firing position display management process executed in step S32-11 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing firing position display management processing.
When the firing position display management process is executed in step S32-11, as shown in FIG. 45, the process first proceeds to step S39-1.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not a right-handed notification start designation command has been received, and if it is determined that a right-handed notification start designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2. If it is determined that the notification start designation command has not been received (No), the process proceeds to step S39-3.
Here, whether or not the hitting right notification start designation command is received is determined based on whether or not the hitting right notification start designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .
In step S39-2, right hitting notification start processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S39-3. In the right-handed notification start process, the right-handed notification effect is started.
In the pachinko machine 1, during a period satisfying at least one condition of the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the occurrence of a small win game state, and the consecutive chance period, A hitting-to-the-right notification effect for designating (notifying) the launch of the game ball to the right path 30b is executed.
In the right-handed notification effect, on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, information specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path 30b (in this embodiment, the characters "right-handed" and an arrow pointing to the right) ) is displayed.
In the right-handed notification start process, "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. FIG.
In addition, it reads out the production control table which corresponds to hitting to the right information production. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, the hitting to the right notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S39-3, it is determined whether or not a right-handed notification end designation command has been received, and if it is determined that a right-handed notification end designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-4. If it is determined that the command for specifying the end of the notification has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-12).
Here, whether or not the right hitting notification end designation command is received is determined based on whether or not the right hitting notification end designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 .
In step S39-4, a right-handed notification end process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-12). In the right-handed notification end processing, the right-handed notification effect is terminated.
In the right-handed notification start process, the right-handed notification effect is terminated, and "0" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. - 特許庁
At this time, the configuration may be such that the left-hand hitting notification effect is started.
In the left-handed notification effect, on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, information specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path 30a (in this embodiment, the characters "Please return to left-handed" and A pointing arrow) is displayed.
In the case of such a configuration, the effect control table corresponding to the left-handed notification effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 . As a result, a left-handed notification effect is started based on the set effect control table.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of game progress in the pachinko machine 1. FIG.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a game ball passes through the starting gate 41, various random numbers such as winning random numbers are acquired, and the acquired random numbers are stored in the normal pattern starting information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal pattern starting information. be done.
Then, for the normal pattern start information stored in the normal pattern start information storage area, in a predetermined order, the normal pattern start determination including the normal pattern hit/loss determination that determines the lottery result ("normal pattern hit" or "loss") is executed.
When the normal pattern start determination is executed, in the normal pattern display device 60, after the variable display of the normal pattern is performed, the stop display of the normal pattern is performed according to the result of the normal pattern win-lose determination.
Then, when the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined to be "normal pattern winning" by the normal pattern winning/losing determination, the normal pattern winning game state is generated after the stop display of the normal pattern is executed.
In the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second start port 52.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a game ball enters the starting holes 51 and 52, various random numbers such as winning random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are acquired, and the acquired random numbers are used as special figure start. Information (special figure 1 starting information or special figure 2 starting information) is stored in the special figure starting information storage area (special figure 1 starting information storage area or special figure 2 starting information storage area) of the RAM 230.
Then, for the special figure start information stored in the special figure start information storage area, in a predetermined order, the lottery result ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss") is determined Special figure hit determination and stop A start determination including stop symbol determination for determining a symbol and variation pattern determination for determining the type of variation pattern related to the variation display for notifying the result of the special symbol hit/loss determination is executed.
In addition, if it is determined that you have won the "big hit" or "small hit" by the special hit/drop determination, the winning type (big hit game state type or small hit game state type) is determined by the stop design determination. be.
Here, in the first special symbol lottery (special figure hit/loss determination based on special figure 1 start information), there is no winning of "small hit" (lottery result becomes "big hit" or "loss").
On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery (special figure winning/losing determination based on special figure 2 start information), there is no chance of winning "lost" (lottery result becomes "big hit" or "small hit").
In addition, as a type of the small winning game state that occurs when a "small win" is won, a "V winning possible small win ” (“small win 1” to “small win 3”) and “V winning small win” (“small win impossible”) in which it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the Hit 4” to “small hit 6”) are set.

When the starting determination is executed, in the special figure display devices 61 and 62, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation pattern determination, after the variation display of the special symbol is performed, the result of the stop symbol determination A special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the mode according to.
Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "big hit" by the special symbol hit/loss determination, after the special symbol stop display is executed, the jackpot game state according to the type determined by the stop symbol determination is generated.
In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Then, it is possible to enter the game ball into the big winning device 53 during each round game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol lottery is "small hit" by the special symbol hit/loss determination, after the special symbol stop display is executed, the small hit according to the type determined by the stop symbol determination A game state is generated.
In the small winning game state, a small winning game is executed in which the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Then, it is possible to enter the game ball into the accessory winning device 54 during the small winning game.
Then, when the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, the big winning game state is started according to the end of the small winning game state.
At this time, when "small win 1" is won, "small win 1 continuous jackpot" is started, and when "small win 2" is won, "small win 2 continuous jackpot" is started and " When "small win 3" is won, "small win 3 continuous big win" is started, and when "small win 4" is won, "small win 4 continuous big win" is started and "small win 5" is started. When winning 2, ``5 consecutive small winnings'' are started, and when ``6 small winnings'' are won, ``6 consecutive small winnings'' are started.
On the other hand, when passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the state shifts to a "special figure variation waiting state".

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined condition including occurrence of a big win game state is established, time saving control is started in response to the end of the big win game state.
During the execution of the time saving control, the time for performing the variable display of the normal symbols is shortened compared to the time when the time saving control is stopped, and in the normal game state, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a is extended ( The number of opening times is increased). As a result, during the execution of the time-saving control, there is a higher possibility that the second special symbol lottery will be executed compared to when the time-saving control is stopped (entering the game ball into the second start port 52 is easy becomes).
In this embodiment, when a jackpot game state related to "jackpot 1" or "small hit 1 continuous jackpot" to "small hit 6 continuous jackpot" is generated, time saving control is performed in response to the end of the jackpot game state. is started.
In addition, when "jackpot 2" is won by a special symbol lottery executed during execution of the time saving control, the time saving control is started according to the end of the big win game state.
On the other hand, when "jackpot 2" is won by a special symbol lottery executed while the time saving control is stopped, the time saving control is not started according to the end of the big win game state.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the player can win many prize balls by entering game balls into the big winning device 53 during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a combination that can cause a jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a "jackpot occurrence combination") by the second special symbol lottery is determined by the first special symbol lottery. It is set high compared to the probability of winning the lottery.
In this embodiment, the "jackpot occurrence combination" is "jackpot 1", "jackpot 2" or "small win 1" to "small win 3".
Therefore, the player progresses the game with the aim of obtaining more opportunities for the second special symbol lottery.
However, in the pachinko machine 1, it is difficult to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery while the time saving control is stopped, and on the other hand, it is difficult to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery while the time saving control is being executed. easier.
Therefore, while the time saving control is stopped, it is difficult to get an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery, so the player can start the time saving control by the first special symbol lottery "jackpot"("jackpot 1 ”), the game progresses with the aim of winning.
On the other hand, during execution of the time-saving control, it becomes easier to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery, so the player can use the second special symbol lottery to generate a special role ("V winning prize") The game is progressed with the aim of winning a "potential small win", "big win 1" or "big win 2").

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, obtaining an opportunity for the second special lottery is more advantageous to the player than obtaining an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery.
During execution of the time saving control, compared to when the time saving control is stopped, it becomes easier to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery, which is advantageous to the player.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the time-saving control for each round is based on (1) winning a "jackpot" by a special symbol lottery, (2) V winning during the occurrence of a small winning game state (passing through the V area by a game ball ) is detected, (3) the total number of fluctuations performed during the time saving control reaches a predetermined first time saving number of times (100 [times] in this embodiment), (4) the time saving control Toku-zu 2 fluctuation number of times executed during has reached the predetermined second time-saving number of times (in this embodiment, 4 [times]), and when one condition is established, it is terminated.
Also, in the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area has priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area, Starting determination (special figure hit-loss determination, special figure stop design determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) is executed.
Then, when the time saving control is terminated in response to the fact that the special figure 2 fluctuation number of times executed during the time saving control reaches the predetermined second time saving number of times (in this embodiment, 4 [times]) , If the special figure 2 start information of "1" or more is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (if the number of special figure 2 reservations is "1" or more), after the end of the time saving control Even if there is, it will be in an advantageous state for the player until the special figure win-loss determination (second special symbol lottery) is executed for all the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. .
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the following "continuous chance period" is defined as a game period in which the game state is advantageous to the player (a state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed).
That is, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "jackpot 1" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed while the time saving control is stopped, the jackpot game state ends (starting the time saving control ).
The consecutive chance period continues as long as the time saving control is being executed or the jackpot gaming state is occurring.
And, during the continuous chan period, when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter or second time saving counter) becoming "0", special figure 2 start information storage area If the special figure 2 start information is not stored in (the number of special figure 2 reservations is "0"), it is terminated according to the end of the time saving control.
In the following description, when the time-saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time-saving counter (first time-saving counter or second time-saving counter) becoming "0", it is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area The special figure 2 starting information that is in is set as "holding special figure 2 starting information at the end of time saving". Moreover, let the special figure 2 starting information by which starting determination is performed last among the holding special figure 2 starting information at the time of the time saving end be "the last special figure 2 starting information."
On the other hand, during the continuous chan period, when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter or second time saving counter) becoming "0", special figure 2 start information storage area If "1" or more special figure 2 start information is stored (special figure 2 reservation number is "1" or more), it is not terminated according to the end of the time saving control. In this case, the consecutive chance period continues at least until the end of the small winning gaming state generated based on the final special figure 2 start information If the special figure 2 start information indicates "V prize impossible small hit"). At this time, if the passage of the game ball through the V region is not detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the consecutive chance period is terminated when the small winning game state ends. On the other hand, when passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the consecutive chance period is continued thereafter.
In the following description, the period from the stop of the time saving control to the end of the small winning game state (small winning game state related to the end of the consecutive chance period) generated based on the final special figure 2 start information Advantageous period after shortening working hours".
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a continuous game is played over a plurality of different game states (during execution of time reduction control, during occurrence of a jackpot game state, and during stoppage of time reduction control (advantageous period after time reduction)). A period is specified.

And, in the pachinko machine 1, during execution of the time saving control, during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, and during the stop of the time saving control (advantageous period after the time saving) are defined as the consecutive chance period, so that the time saving control is being executed. And, compared with the case where the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is defined as the consecutive chance period, the continuation rate during the consecutive chance period can be improved.
Here, the “continuation rate during the consecutive chance period” is based on the special symbol lottery executed during the consecutive chance period, and the combination that can start the time saving control (hereinafter referred to as “time saving start role”). It means the probability of winning.
In the present embodiment, the time-saving starter during execution of the time-saving control is "jackpot 1", "jackpot 2", or "small win 1 continuous jackpot" to "small win 3 continuous jackpot". On the other hand, the time-saving starting hand related to the stop of the time-saving control is "jackpot 1" or "small win 1 continuous jackpot" to "small win 3 continuous jackpot".
First, the calculation method of the continuation rate during each period during execution of time saving control and during an advantageous period after time saving is demonstrated.
The continuation rate X in each period is calculated by the following formula (1).
X=1−Y Expression (1)
Here, "Y" is the probability that the time-saving starter is not won during the period.
Also, "Y" is calculated by the following formula (2).
Y= ^yz Expression (2)
Here, "y" is the probability that the second special symbol lottery (start determination) of each time will result in the loss of the time-saving starting combination. Also, "z" is the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery, which is the end condition of the period.
In this embodiment, it becomes "z" = 2nd number of times of time saving (4 [times] in this embodiment) during execution of time saving control. On the other hand, during the time saving advantageous period, it becomes "z" = the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 pending (4 [pieces] in this embodiment).
Moreover, y is calculated by the following formula (3).
y=1−W Expression (3)
Here, "W" is the probability of winning the time-saving start combination by the second special symbol lottery (start determination) each time.

Then, the continuation rate during execution of the time saving control is calculated as follows.
That is, the probability of winning the "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 2" during execution of the time saving control is "1/199".
In addition, during the execution of time saving control, the probability of winning "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" is "39.6/199" (198/199 (probability of winning a small hit) x 20/100 ( Probability that "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" will be selected)).
Therefore, during the time-saving control, "W" ≈ 0.204 (probability of winning 1/199 ("jackpot 1" or "jackpot 2")) + 39.6/199 ("small hit 1" to " The probability of winning a small hit 3”)).
Moreover, according to the above formula (3), "y"≈0.796 during execution of the time saving control.
Here, during execution of time saving control, it becomes "z" = 2nd number of times of time saving (4 [times] in this embodiment). Therefore, according to the above formula (2), "Y"≈0.401 during execution of the time saving control.
Therefore, according to the above formula (1), the continuation rate "X" during execution of the time saving control becomes ≈0.599 (approximately 60%).

On the other hand, the continuation rate during the post-time reduction advantageous period (while the time reduction control is stopped) is calculated as follows.
That is, while the time saving control is stopped, the probability of winning the "jackpot 1" is "0.4/199" (1/199 (probability of winning the jackpot) x 40/100 ("jackpot 1" is selected probability)).
Also, while the time saving control is stopped, the probability of winning "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" is "39.6/199" (198/199 (probability of winning a small hit) x 20/100 ( Probability that "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" will be selected)).
Therefore, while the time saving control is stopped, "W" ≈ 0.20 (0.4/199 (probability of winning "jackpot 1") + 39.6/199 ("small hit 1" to "small hit 3" probability of winning)).
Further, according to the above formula (3), "y"≈0.80 while the time saving control is stopped.
Here, during the time saving advantageous period, "z" = the upper limit value of the number of special figures 2 reserved (4 [pieces] in this embodiment). Therefore, according to the above formula (2), "Y"≈0.409 during the advantageous period after shortening working hours.
Therefore, according to the above formula (1), the continuation rate "X" during the advantageous period after shortening working hours ≈ 0.591 (about 59%).

On the other hand, the continuation rate during the consecutive chance period according to the present embodiment is calculated as follows.
In other words, "Y" during the continuous playing period according to the present embodiment is calculated by the following formula (4).
Y=Y1×Y2= Expression (4)
Here, "Y1" is the probability that the time saving starting role is not won during the time saving control ("Y" during the time saving control described above). In addition, "Y2" is the probability that the time saving start role is not won during the time saving advantageous period ("Y" related to the time saving advantageous period above).
Here, as described above, "Y1"≈0.401 and "Y2"≈0.409.
Therefore, "Y" during the consecutive chance period is approximately equal to 0.164.
Therefore, according to the above formula (1), the continuation rate "X" during the consecutive chance period ≈ 0.836 (approximately 83%).

As a result, if the duration of the time saving control and the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state are defined as the consecutive chance period, the continuation rate during the consecutive chance period is consistent with the continuation rate during the execution of the time saving control do. That is, the continuation rate during the consecutive chance period is "0.599" (approximately 60%).
On the other hand, during the execution of the time saving control, during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and during the stop of the time saving control (advantageous period after the time saving) is defined as the consecutive chance period, the continuation rate during the consecutive chance period , "0.836" (about 83%).
Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to improve the continuation rate during the consecutive chance period as compared with the case where the execution of the time saving control and the occurrence of the jackpot game state are defined as the consecutive chance period.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, during the continuous playing period, predetermined forms of effects (fluctuation effect, stop effect, small winning effect, V winning effect, and big winning effect) are executed. That is, during the consecutive chance period, the variation effect, the stop effect, the small win effect, the V winning effect, and the big win effect that share the theme (theme) with each other (the aspects (contents) related to each other) are executed. be.
That is, during the continuous chan period, during the execution of the time saving control, during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and during the stop of the time saving control (advantageous period after the time saving), the production (related aspect (content ) is executed.
As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can give the player the impression that a series of game states are continuing during the continuous playing period.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the occurrence of the jackpot game state related to the "first win" and during the consecutive winning period, the effects (variation effects, stop effects, A small winning effect, a V prize winning effect, and a big winning effect) are executed.
Here, the "first hit" means a "jackpot"("jackpot1" or "jackpot 2") won from the first special symbol lottery (start determination) executed while the time saving control is stopped.
Then, when the "first win" is won, a judge effect is executed as a big win effect executed during the occurrence of the big win game state related to the "first win".
The judge effect includes a teammate character selection effect and a judge result effect.
In the ally character selection effect, it is possible to select the types of ally characters (“ally character A” to “ally character C”) according to the player's pressing operation of the effect button 5b.
In addition, in the judgment result effect, it is suggested whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the consecutive chance period is started). At this time, whether or not time-saving control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the consecutive chance period is started) depending on the production content corresponding to the type of ally character selected by the ally character selection production is suggested.

When "big win 1" is won as the "first win", time saving control is started in accordance with the end of the big win game state related to the "first win", and a consecutive chance period is started.
Then, the notification effect (fluctuation effect and stop effect) executed during the notification display based on the second special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the consecutive chance period, and the execution during the occurrence of the small winning game state A battle production is executed as a small hit production.
In the battle production, a production image in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight is displayed, and depending on the content of the production image, the result of the special symbol lottery (“V win possible small win” or “V win impossible small win”) is displayed. It is suggested (announced). At this time, as the ally character, the ally character of the type selected by the ally character selection effect relating to the "first hit" is set.

Also, based on the second special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the consecutive chance period, "V win possible small win" is won, and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. In the case of being executed, a round number suggesting effect (initial notification effect) is executed as the V winning effect.
Here, when the non-addition mode is selected as the mode of the number-of-rounds suggesting effect, the initial notification effect is executed as the number-of-rounds suggesting effect during the occurrence of the small winning game state.
On the other hand, when the additional aspect is selected as the aspect of the round number suggesting effect, the initial notification effect is executed as the round number suggesting effect while the small winning game state is occurring, and the big winning game state occurs. During that time, one or more additional performances are executed.
Then, in the number-of-rounds suggesting effect, the number of round games to be executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state caused by the passage of the game ball through the V area is suggested.

Here, when winning the "V prize possible small winning" based on the second special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the consecutive chance period, the first preliminary determination and the second preliminary determination are executed. .
In the first preliminary determination, among the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the contents of the special figure 2 start information (special figure hit/loss determination result) is determined.
On the other hand, in the second prior determination, the contents of all the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (the result of the special figure hit-drop determination) are determined.
Further, in the present embodiment, a single battle effect and a continuous battle effect are set as the types of battle effects.
Then, based on the second special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the consecutive chance period, the ``V win possible small win'' is won, and the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. When it is done, the result of the first preliminary determination is suggested by the type of battle effect executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
At this time, the expected value when the continuous battle effect is executed is higher than the expected value when the one-shot battle effect is executed. The "expected value" here is the special figure 2 start information related to the first preliminary determination (out of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the first to third start determination is It is an expected value for the fact that the special figure 2 starting information indicating that the special role has been won is included in the special figure 2 starting information to be executed.

Also, based on the second special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the consecutive chance period, "V win possible small win" is won, and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. When it is executed, a battle type suggesting effect is executed as a big win effect executed during occurrence of the big win game state.
In the battle type suggesting effect, the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 displays an effect image in which a friendly character and an enemy character face each other. The type of battle presentation to be executed after the end is suggested (notified).
Here, in the battle type suggesting effect, an ally character related to the type selected by the ally character selection effect related to "first hit" is set as the ally character. Also, when the continuous battle production is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the enemy character that appears in the continuous battle production (each individual battle production) ) is set.

Further, during execution of the battle suggestive effect, whether or not the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the big win game state is suggested depending on whether or not the battle icon is acquired.
Specifically, when a battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 (when the battle icon is acquired) during execution of the battle type suggestion effect, after the jackpot gaming state ends, A continuous battle production is executed.
On the other hand, when the battle icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 (when the battle icon is not obtained) during execution of the battle type suggesting effect, after the jackpot gaming state ends, A single-shot battle production is executed.
Furthermore, during execution of the battle effect, the result of the second preliminary determination is suggested depending on whether or not the celebration icon has been obtained.
Specifically, when a celebration icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggestion effect (when the celebration icon is acquired), a special figure related to the second preliminary determination 2 start information (special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area), it is determined that the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific role was won was included.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the continuation rate is increased by executing predetermined modes of effects (fluctuation effect, stop effect, small winning effect, V winning effect, and big winning effect) during the continuous playing period. It is possible to suggest to the player that the high game period (continuous chance period) continues.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, during the consecutive chance period, during the execution of the time saving control and during the stop of the time saving control (during the advantageous period after the time saving), a predetermined mode of production (variation production, stop production, small By executing the win effect, the V prize effect, and the jackpot effect, the player can be given an impression that a series of game states are continuing even if the game states are internally different. can.
Specifically, when the special figure fluctuation pattern determination (step S11-7) based on the special figure 2 start information executed during the time saving control is satisfied (the value of the second time saving counter is " 0” when the time saving control is terminated) to the special figure 2 start information (hereinafter referred to as “holding second special game information”) stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area Based on the special figure variation pattern determination (step S11-7), the variation pattern lottery table containing the same variation pattern type (special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table and special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table) Based on Then, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
In this embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination (step S11-7) based on the special figure 2 starting information executed during the execution of the time saving control, and the special figure variation pattern determination based on the pending second special game information (step S11 -7), the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the same content variation pattern lottery table (special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table and special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table) be.
Thereby, the mode of notification display related to the notification display of the special symbol based on the special figure 2 start information executed during the execution of the time saving control (variation pattern type) and the special figure 2 executed during the stop of the time saving control The mode of notification display (type of variation pattern) related to the notification display of the special symbol based on the starting information is related to each other (the same variation time).
Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the first specific advantageous state composed of different game states (during execution of time saving control and during stop of time saving control) as a series of game states.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 46, in response to the start of the jackpot game state related to the "first hit", a right hitting notification (a right hitting notification display on the firing position indicator of the state display device 63, and Right hitting notification effect on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 is started.
Then, the right hitting information is continued until the end of the consecutive chance period started in accordance with the end of the big win gaming state related to the "first hit".
That is, during the continuous chan period, the hitting to the right notification is continued until the end of the post-time saving advantageous period without being ended according to the end of the time saving control.
Specifically, the right-handed notification is, when the time-saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time-saving counter (first time-saving counter or second time-saving counter) becoming "0", special figure 2 start If the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the information storage area (special figure 2 reservation number is "0"), it is terminated according to the end of the time saving control.
On the other hand, the right-handed notification is, when the time-saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time-saving counter (first time-saving counter or second time-saving counter) becoming "0", special figure 2 start information storage area If "1" or more special figure 2 start information is stored in (the number of special figure 2 reservations is "1" or more), at least the small generated based on the final special figure 2 start information It continues until the end of the winning game state (when all the time-saving termination hold special figure 2 start information except the final special figure 2 start information indicates "V winning impossible small hit"). At this time, if the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the right hitting information is terminated according to the end of the small winning game state. On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the right hitting information is continued thereafter.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "V win possible small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving advantageous period, the game ball is placed on the right side during the occurrence of the small win game state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the missile is not fired toward the path 30b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the passing of the game ball through the V area (V winning) cannot be obtained during the occurrence of the small winning game state generated based on the second special symbol lottery.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the action of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area has priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. Win/lose determination (start determination) is executed. Moreover, when the special figure 2 variation frequency executed during the execution of the time saving control reaches the predetermined second time saving number of times, the time saving control is ended.
Thereby, the state in which the special figure hit-loss determination based on the special figure 2 start information is continuously executed (hereinafter referred to as "first specific advantageous state") can be configured.
Specifically, from the start of the time saving control, after the end of the time saving control, until the notification display of the special symbol based on all the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is finished During the period, a first specific advantageous state can be configured.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the notification effect (variation effect and stop effect) corresponding to the notification display that notifies the result of the special figure hit/loss determination based on the special figure 2 start information executed during the execution of the time saving control, and the time saving end When the condition is satisfied (when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the second time saving counter becoming "0"), the special figure 2 starting information stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area ( hereinafter referred to as "reserved second special game information"), and the notification effect (fluctuation effect and stop effect) corresponding to the notification display that notifies the result of the special hit/loss determination based on ).
As a result, the effect content related to the notification effect executed during the execution of the time saving control and the effect content related to the notification effect executed during the stop of the time saving control (notification effect based on the pending second special game information) become related to each other.
Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the first specific advantageous state composed of different game states (during execution of time saving control and during stop of time saving control) as a series of game states,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the small winning performance is executed during the occurrence of the small winning game state when it is determined that the "small winning" is won by the special prize winning judgment executed during the execution of the time saving control. And, the notification effect corresponding to the notification display that notifies the result of the special figure hit-loss determination based on the special figure 2 start information executed during the execution of the time saving control, and the result of the special figure hit-loss determination based on the pending second special game information and the notification effect corresponding to the notification display for informing the , are mutually related effect contents (battle effect).
As a result, the production contents related to the small hit production executed during the execution of the time saving control, the production contents related to the notification production executed during the execution of the time saving control, and the notification production executed while the time saving control is stopped ( The content of the effect related to the notification effect based on the reserved second special game information) is related to each other.
Therefore, the first specific advantageous state composed of different game states (during execution of time reduction control and during stop of time reduction control) can be more strongly recognized by the player as a series of game states, and the game can be improved. It is possible to further improve interest.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, time saving control is started in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state.
As a result, a state that is advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "second specific advantageous state") is formed over the duration of the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the execution of the time saving control, and after the end of the time saving control. be able to.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the jackpot effect (judge effect) executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state and the result of the special prize hit/loss determination based on the second start information executed during the execution of the time saving control are notified. Regarding the notification effect corresponding to the display and the notification effect corresponding to the notification display that notifies the result of the special hit-loss determination based on the reserved second special game information, the effect content (the theme is "competition") that is related to each other It is said to be a production).
As a result, the production contents related to the jackpot performance executed during the occurrence of the jackpot specific game state, the production contents related to the notification performance executed during the time reduction control, and the notification performance executed while the time reduction control is stopped (Notification effect based on reserved second special game information) and the content of effect related to each other.
Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the second specific advantageous state composed of mutually different game states (during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, during execution of the time reduction control, and during the stop of the time reduction control) as a series of game states. , it becomes possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Modification)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiments.
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the consecutive chance period is ended according to the end of the small winning game state generated based on the final special figure 2 starting information.
However, the consecutive chance period may be configured to be terminated according to the end of the second special symbol notification display (fluctuation display and stop display) based on the final special figure 2 starting information.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery does not include "loss" (loss) ("loss" is never selected).
However, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery may include "loss" (loss) ("loss" may be selected).
In the case of such a configuration, the continuous chan period is when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter or second time saving counter) becoming "0", time saving end When the time reservation special figure 2 starting information does not exist, it is terminated according to the end of the time saving control.
On the other hand, when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter or second time saving counter) becoming "0", when the time saving end time hold special figure 2 start information exists , at least until the end of the special symbol notification display (variable display and stop display) generated based on the final special figure 2 start information, the consecutive chance period continues (except for the final special figure 2 start information If all the time-saving end pending special figure 2 start information indicates "V prize impossible small hit"). At this time, the result of the special figure hit-loss determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "small hit", and the game ball is used during the occurrence of the small hit game state caused based on the final special figure 2 start information If the passage of the V area is not detected, or if the result of the special figure hit-drop determination based on the final special figure 2 starting information is "missing", the notification of the special symbol based on the final special figure 2 starting information When the display ends, the consecutive chance period ends. On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit-loss determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "small hit", and V by the game ball during the occurrence of the small hit game state caused based on the final special figure 2 start information If the passage of the area is detected, or if the result of the special figure hit and drop determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "jackpot", the notification display of the special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information Even after the end, the consecutive chance period continues.
In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the right-handed notification is when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter or second time saving counter) becoming "0". If there is no special figure 2 starting information at the end of time saving, it is ended according to the end of the time saving control.
On the other hand, when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter or second time saving counter) becoming "0", when the time saving end time hold special figure 2 start information exists , at least until the end of the special symbol notification display (variable display and stop display) generated based on the final special figure 2 starting information, the right-handed notification is continued (excluding the final special figure 2 starting information If all the time-saving end pending special figure 2 start information indicates "V prize impossible small hit"). At this time, the result of the special figure hit-loss determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "small hit", and the game ball is used during the occurrence of the small hit game state caused based on the final special figure 2 start information If the passage of the V area is not detected, or if the result of the special figure hit-drop determination based on the final special figure 2 starting information is "missing", the notification of the special symbol based on the final special figure 2 starting information When the display ends, the hitting right notification ends. On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit and drop determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "small hit", and V by the game ball during the occurrence of the small hit game state caused based on the final special figure 2 start information If the passage of the area is detected, or if the result of the special figure hit-drop determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "jackpot", the notification display of the special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information Even after the end, the right hitting information is continued.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the "V win possible small hit" is won based on the second special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the consecutive chance period, the first preliminary determination and the second preliminary determination are performed. executed. Then, based on the result of the first preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not to acquire (display) the battle icon during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. Also, based on the result of the first preliminary determination, the type of battle effect to be executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined. Furthermore, based on the result of the second preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not to acquire (display) the celebration icon during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state.
However, during the consecutive chance period, the timing of executing the first preliminary determination and the second preliminary determination and the timing of suggesting the result of each preliminary determination can be changed as appropriate.
For example, at the end of the continuous battle production (at the end of the small winning game state), it may be configured to execute the first preliminary determination and the second preliminary determination. In such a configuration, it is determined whether or not to obtain (display) a battle icon at the end of the continuous battle effect (while the small winning game state is occurring) based on the result of the first preliminary determination. Also, based on the result of the first preliminary determination, the type of battle effect to be executed after the end of the continuous battle effect (after the end of the small winning game state) is determined. Furthermore, based on the result of the second preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not to obtain (display) a celebration icon at the end of the continuous battle effect (while the small winning game state is occurring). This makes it possible to further execute a new continuous battle effect after the end of the continuous battle effect.
Alternatively, during each single-shot battle production (at the start of the variable display, at the start of the stop display, at the start of the small hit game state, at the end of the small hit game state, etc.), the first preliminary judgment and the second preliminary judgment It does not matter if the configuration is executed. In the case of such a configuration, whether to acquire (display) a battle icon during the single-shot battle production (during variable display, during stop display, during occurrence of small winning game state, etc.) based on the result of the first preliminary determination Decide whether or not Further, based on the result of the first preliminary determination, the type of battle production to be executed after the end of the single-shot battle production (after the end of the small winning game state) is determined. Furthermore, based on the result of the second preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not to obtain (display) the celebration icon during the single-shot battle production (during variable display, during stop display, during occurrence of small winning game state, etc.). This makes it possible to develop a single-shot battle effect into a continuous battle effect (change the type of battle effect).

1 pachinko machine 11 game board 23 image display device 24 drum-type display device 30 game area 30a left path 30b right path 41 start gate 51 first start port 52 second start port 52a normal electric accessory 53 big winning device 53a special electric role Item 54 Accessory winning device 54a Special electric accessory 200 Main control circuit 300 Effect control circuit

Claims (1)

first game information acquisition means for acquiring first game information in response to establishment of a first condition;
a second game information acquisition means for acquiring second game information in response to establishment of a second condition;
a game determination means for executing a game determination based on the first game information or the second game information;
game information storage means for storing the second game information for which the game determination has not been executed, with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
a first notification display means for executing a first notification display according to the result of the game determination based on the first game information;
a second notification display means for executing a second notification display according to the result of the game determination based on the second game information;
Predetermined game state control means for starting a predetermined game state in which the second condition is easily established in accordance with the establishment of the predetermined condition;
Effect control means for executing a notification effect according to the mode of the second notification display,
The predetermined game state control means terminates the predetermined game state when the number of times of the second notification display executed during the predetermined game state reaches a predetermined number of times,
The notification effect corresponding to the second notification display executed during the predetermined game state, and the second game information based on the second game information stored in the game information storage means at the end of the predetermined game state. The game machine is characterized in that the notification effect corresponding to the notification display can be executed over a plurality of times of the second notification display, in which the characters fight against each other.

Images